Siemens MOBY I MDS 401, MDS 402, MDS 403, MDS 404, MDS 506, MDS 507, MDS 514, MDS 439 E, SLG 40, SLG 40-S, SLG 41, SLG 41-S, SLG 41C, SLG 41CC, SLG 42, SLG 43, SLG 44, ASM 400, ASM 401, ASM 410, ASM 450, ASM 452, ASM 454, ASM 424, ASM 470, SIM Manual
Below you will find brief information for MOBY I MDS 401, MOBY I MDS 402, MOBY I MDS 403, MOBY I MDS 404, MOBY I MDS 506, MOBY I MDS 507, MOBY I MDS 514, MOBY I MDS 439 E, MOBY I SLG 40, MOBY I SLG 40-S, MOBY I SLG 41, MOBY I SLG 41-S, MOBY I SLG 41C, MOBY I SLG 41CC, MOBY I SLG 42, MOBY I SLG 43, MOBY I SLG 44, MOBY I ASM 400, MOBY I ASM 401, MOBY I ASM 410, MOBY I ASM 450, MOBY I ASM 452, MOBY I ASM 454, MOBY I ASM 424, MOBY I ASM 470, MOBY I ASM 475, MOBY I ASM 473, MOBY I SIM, MOBY I STG I, MOBY I ES 030. The manual provides details on configuration, installation, and service aspects of these components, which are designed for data transfer in challenging industrial environments.
advertisement
Assistant Bot
Need help? Our chatbot has already read the manual and is ready to assist you. Feel free to ask any questions about the device, but providing details will make the conversation more productive.
Table of Contents MOBYR I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual 6GT2 097-4BA00-0EA2 Published in January, 2007 General 1 Introduction to MOBY I 2 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3 Mobile Data Memories 4 Read/Write Devices 5 Interfaces 6 Accessories 7 Documentation A Error Messages B ASCII Table C Compatibility D Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger: ! Danger ! Warning ! Caution indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken. indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Note draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation. Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual. Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards. Correct Usage ! Note the following: Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended. Trademarks MOBYR, SIMATICR and SINECR are trademarks of SIEMENS AG. Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the owner’s rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes. Copyright E Siemens AG 1997 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. Siemens AG Automation and Drives Special Products, Projects Automotive Industry, Training P.O. Box 4848, D-90327 Nuernberg E Siemens AG 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006 Technical data subject to change. Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No. 6GT2 097-4BA00-0EA2 Table of Contents 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 2 Introduction to MOBY I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 3 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 Basic Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit Period of the MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication between ASM, SLG and MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication between ASM and User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3-3 3-7 3-8 3-11 3-12 3.2 Field Data of MDS and SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 3.3 MOBY I Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 3.4 Presentation of Speed to Amount of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition of the Metal-Free Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects of Metal on the Transmission Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction of Metallic Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Side Lobes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 3-23 3-25 3-28 3-32 3-33 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.6.4 3.6.5 Configuration with MDS 507 and SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Presence Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameterization of the MDS 507 in the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Configuration Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dead Battery Measurement and Changing the Battery for MDS 507 . . . . Reducing the Sensitivity of the SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 3-36 3-39 3-41 3-48 3-52 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 Configuration with MDS 439 E (Heat-Proof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Dependency of the Transmission Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperatures During Cyclic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Life Span of the Mobile Data Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 3-56 3-58 3-61 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.8.5 3.8.6 3.8.7 3.8.8 3.8.9 EMC Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spreading of Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avoiding Interference Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipotential Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielding the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Rules on EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62 3-62 3-63 3-64 3-67 3-70 3-71 3-72 3-74 3-76 3.9 Concept of MOBY Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 i Table of Contents 3.10 3.10.1 3.10.2 3.10.3 3.10.4 4 5 6 ii Cable and Plug Connector Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug Connector Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80 3-80 3-82 3-84 3-87 Mobile Data Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4.2 MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4.3 MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 4.4 MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 4.5 MDS 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 4.6 MDS 506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 4.7 MDS 507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 4.8 MDS 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 4.9 MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Read/Write Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5.2 SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.3 SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5.4 SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 5.5 SLG 41C/SLG 41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 5.6 SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 5.7 SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 5.8 SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC S5 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 6-4 6-10 6-14 6.3 ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 6.4 ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 6.5 ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38 6.6 ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 6.7 ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 6.8 SIM Serial Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Table of Contents 7 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.1 MOBY Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7.2 MOBY Wide-Range Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 7.3 MOBY STG I Hand-Held Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 7.4 Acquisition Station ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 A Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 B Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B.1 General Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 B.2 B.2.1 B.2.2 B.2.3 B.2.4 ASM-Related Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 400 with FB 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 450 with FB 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Indication with FC 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 B-7 B-9 B-11 B-13 B.3 Filehandler Error Messages for ASM 401/452/473/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16 C ASCII Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 D Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 iii Table of Contents Figures 2-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-46 3-47 3-48 3-49 iv Overview of MOBY I components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in static operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in dynamic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical direction of movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal direction of movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerances of the height allowance of the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialog setup for MOBY I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window during dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 41 (vertical operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 42 (vertical operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 43 (vertical operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 44 (data quantity at low speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 44 (enlarged section of figure 3-13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation on metal carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the SLG on metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting the MDS on metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfering metal carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly line with MDS 403 reclining or standing (top) and MDS 404 (bottom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample configuration of tABTAST: Train with several cars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of the configuration (drawn to scale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding for tABTAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Real transmission window between the MDS 507 and the SLG 44 . . . . . Main lobe with different operating distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main and side lobes with different operating distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch-on window for various receiving capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch-on window with various angle deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the MDS 507 with dead battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dead battery measurement with the STG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dead battery message with SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction of the receiving capacity of the SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the cover of the SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soldered jumpers and antenna measuring points on the SLG 44 . . . . . . . Label for identification of the hardware status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset factor C in relation to the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction of field length and limit distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of the temperature progression from table 3-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Complete temperature progression during simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spreading of interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The four kinds of interference coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielding via housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avoidance of interference via optimal layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering the supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suppression of inductive interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipotential bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagram of the principle of grounding fault monitoring . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC PLC 100U with ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-5 3-6 3-12 3-13 3-17 3-19 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-28 3-29 3-32 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-47 3-48 3-48 3-52 3-54 3-54 3-55 3-57 3-57 3-59 3-60 3-64 3-66 3-67 3-68 3-69 3-70 3-71 3-72 3-73 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Table of Contents 3-50 3-51 3-52 3-53 3-54 3-55 3-56 3-57 3-58 3-59 3-60 3-61 3-62 3-63 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 Serial interface SIM with TTY interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielding of the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of the shield rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interruption of shielded cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple layout with ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout of the ASM 470/475 with shield connecting element . . . . . . . . . . . SLG with supplementary power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY wide-range power pack on the ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing of mounting the SLG plug connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable: ASM 400/401/424/454, ES 030 ↔ SLG . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable: ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable: ASM 410 ↔ SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable: ASM 470/475 ↔ SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection cable RS 232 PC ↔ ASM 424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ways to mount the MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field midpoints of MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field midpoints of MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the MDS 403 with auxiliary lobes . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MDS 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS 506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MDS 506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS 507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MDS 507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MDS 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Holder of the MDS 439 E data memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly of MDS 439 E with holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write device SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting diagram and dimensions of SLG 40 with mounting clamp . . . . Distance D for SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional diagram of SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write device SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D for SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional diagram of SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D for SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-73 3-74 3-75 3-75 3-78 3-79 3-81 3-81 3-83 3-84 3-84 3-85 3-85 3-86 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-28 4-28 4-28 4-29 5-3 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-13 5-13 5-13 v Table of Contents 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-32 5-33 5-34 5-35 5-36 5-37 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 vi Dimensional diagram of SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read head changes of SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 41C/41CC read/write device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free area of SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 42 read/write device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional diagram of SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write device SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional diagram of SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write device SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space of SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional diagram of SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator of ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connectors and their assignment for ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches and plug-in jumpers for ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings on the channel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-0LA module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-0LB module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-1 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-2 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CR 700-3 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ER 701-3 module rack (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5-135U/155U central controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5-155U/155H central controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5-183U expansion device for S5-135U/155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5-184U expansion device for S5-135U/155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5-185U expansion device for S5-135U/155U/155H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5-187U expansion device for S5-135U/155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for the ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 450/452 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator of ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection plug, ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00) . . . . . . . Connection cable, ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG (6GT2 091-1CH20) . . . . . . PROFIBUS cable with 24 V power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of the ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin allocation and LEDs of ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the terminating resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 5-14 5-15 5-18 5-19 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-27 5-27 5-28 5-28 5-29 5-31 5-32 5-32 5-33 6-5 6-10 6-11 6-13 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-15 6-15 6-15 6-16 6-16 6-16 6-17 6-17 6-17 6-18 6-21 6-22 6-25 6-26 6-31 6-32 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Table of Contents 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42 6-43 6-44 6-45 6-46 6-47 6-48 6-49 6-50 6-51 6-52 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 ASM 454/424 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting diagram for the adapter floor plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 470/475 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring of ASM 470/475 to SLG (6GT2 091-0E...) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baring of the cable shield when customer makes own cable . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 473 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for an ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum configuration of ASM 473 on an ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin asssignment and LEDs of ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules. . . . . . . Configurator for SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM serial interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush installation of SIM in metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of SIM serial interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection assignment of 24 V output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY STG I hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware of the MOBY STG I hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator of ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample configuration of ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-38 6-41 6-42 6-42 6-44 6-44 6-45 6-46 6-50 6-52 6-52 6-53 6-55 6-58 6-60 6-61 6-62 6-63 6-64 6-66 6-67 6-67 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-10 7-15 7-19 vii Table of Contents Tables 2-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 viii Technical data of MOBY I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time constants K and tbyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Times for directory operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of all MDS and SLG components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum distance from SLG to SLG in mm (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data during dialog operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions for flush installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction of the field data due to metal. Specifications in % as related to non-metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical resistance of data memories made of polyamide 12 . . . . . . . . . Chemical resistance of the MDS 439 E made of polyphenylene sulfide . Actual processing time of an MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limit distance Sg for reduced sending field strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limit cycles of the temperature for MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical temperature profile of an application in a paint shop . . . . . . . . . . . Interference sources: Origin and effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Causes of coupling paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connector assignment of the SLG plug connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D plug connector . Ordering data for the SLG plug connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MOBY cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview table of MDS (replacement parts not included in the table) . . . Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decrease in field data with mounting of the MDS 401 on or in metal . . . . Ordering data for MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS 506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS 506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS 506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS 507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS 507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS 507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS 514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limit cycles of MDS 439 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 3-9 3-10 3-15 3-16 3-18 3-19 3-24 3-27 3-33 3-35 3-39 3-55 3-58 3-59 3-65 3-66 3-80 3-82 3-82 3-83 3-87 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5 4-5 4-8 4-8 4-9 4-11 4-11 4-12 4-16 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-18 4-19 4-21 4-21 4-22 4-24 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-26 4-27 4-30 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Table of Contents 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 Overview table of the SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 40-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 41C/41CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 400/401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage capacity of the mobile data memories when the filehandler is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of page frame addressing for FB 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status and error LEDs of ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating modes for ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED indication for PROFIBUS diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function of the LEDs on ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional LEDs on the ASM 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites for use of ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of SIM serial interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of plug connector assignment for SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MOBY software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of the MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of the STG I hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-4 5-7 5-7 5-8 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-15 5-15 5-17 5-21 5-21 5-22 5-25 5-25 5-26 5-29 5-30 5-31 6-3 6-6 6-7 6-9 6-11 6-12 6-19 6-19 6-23 6-24 6-28 6-29 6-36 6-39 6-40 6-47 6-48 6-50 6-51 6-56 6-56 6-59 6-64 6-65 6-66 6-68 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-11 ix Table of Contents 7-5 7-6 7-7 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 D-1 x Technical data of the STG I hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error messags of FB 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error messages of FB 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error variable error_FC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error variable error_Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filehandler error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatibility of MDS and SLG types (status: September 2004) . . . . . . . . 7-11 7-16 7-17 B-3 B-7 B-9 B-11 B-13 B-14 B-16 D-1 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 1 General This configuration, installation and service manual will help you to plan and configure your MOBY I system. It covers the guidelines on configuration and installation and provides complete technical data on the individual components. Technical support The specialists of Technical Support are ready to advise and support you when you have questions on the functions and handling of our MOBY products. You can reach us around the clock anywhere in the world. Telephone: Fax: E-mail: Internet +49 (0) 180 5050-222 +49 (0) 180 5050-223 [email protected] General news on MOBY I or an overview of our other identification systems are available on the Internet under the following address. http://www.siemens.de/moby MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 1-1 General 1-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 2 Introduction to MOBY I MOBY I is an RF identification system for optimization of material flow and production processes in the upper performance sector. This high-performance, high-capacity, long-distance system permits high data transmission speeds between data memories (MDS) and read/write devices (SLG). Principal application areas MOBY I is primarily used when object identification must be inductive (i.e., without contact), reliable and fast and production and manufacturing parameters must be carried on the object. S Processing manufacturing (e.g., data memory affixed to the product carrier) S Assembly (e.g., data memory affixed to the work piece carrier) S Conveyors (e.g., data memory on suspended rails) S Transportation Technical data of MOBY I Overview of MOBY I components Table 2-1 Technical data of MOBY I Storage capacity 8 kbytes to 32 kbytes Memory type RAM, EEPROM and FRAM Data organization File or address-oriented Protection rating IP65 to IP68 Operating temperature –25 to +70/85° C, 200° C (cyclic) Data transmission speed (SLG - MDS) w 0.8 msec/byte Read/write distance 0 to 1000 mm Can be connected to SIMATIC S5/7, PCs, computers, PLCs of other manufacturers, and PROFIBUS S MDS (mobile data memory) S SLG (read/write device) S ASM (interface module) S STG (service and test device) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 2-1 Introduction to MOBY I PC/Controller of other manufacturer SIMs operated directly on the serial inteface RS 232 / RS 422 / TTY ASM 400/401 For SIMATIC S 115U S 135U S 155U/H S FB 250/230 ASM 410 ASM 424 ASM 450/452 For SIMATIC For connection to: For S 90U S PC S PROFIBUS DP S 95U S Controller S FB 240/FC 44/ S 100U/H of other FC 46/FC 56 for S ET 100/200 manufacturer SIMATIC S5/S7 S FB 41 S Computer SINUMERIK via serial interface ASM = Interface module ASM 456 ASM 470/475 For For SIMATIC S PROFIBUS DP/ S S7-300 with DPV1 FC 47/FC 45/ S FC 45 FC 56 S ET 200M with FB 47/FC 47/ FC 45/FC 56 ASM 454 For S PROFIBUS DPV1 connection with FC 45 for SIMATIC S7 ASM 473 Fits ET 200X; Control via PROFIBUS DPV1 with FC 45/FC 56 RF170C For S PROFIBUS DP/ DPV1 S PROFIBUS IO S FC 45/FC 55/ FC 56 X1 X2 Internal system interface/max. cable length of 1000 m SLG = Read/ write device SLG 40 SLG 40-S SLG 41 SLG 41-S SLG 41C SLG 41CC SLG 42 SLG 43 SLG 44 SIM 41 SIM 42 SIM 43 MDS 439 E 8-Kbyte EEPROM 200 °C cyclically MDS 507 32-Kbyte RAM/ Range of 1 m Inductive power/data transmission (1.81 MHz/134 kHz) MDS 401 8-Kbyte FRAM MDS 402 8-Kbyte FRAM MDS 403 8-Kbyte FRAM MDS 514 32-Kbyte RAM/FRAM MDS 404 8-Kbyte FRAM MDS 506 32-Kbyte RAM/FRAM MDS = Mobile data memory Figure 2-1 2-2 Overview of MOBY I components MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3 3-1 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1 Basic Requirements ! FCC Compliance Statement Warning Do not make changes to the devices. Violation will invalidate interference emission certification (BZT, FCC), CE and the manufacturer’s warranty. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note Any unauthorized changes and modifications to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. To choose the correct MOBY I components, apply the following criteria to your particular application. S Transmission distance (i.e., read/write distance) S The amount of data to be transferred S Metal-free spaces for MDS and SLG S Static or dynamic transmission of the data S Speed for dynamic transmission S Tolerances of the tracking S Environmental conditions (e.g., moisture, temperature, chemical influences and so on) 3-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.1 Transmission Window The read/write device (i.e., SLG) generates an inductive alternating field. The field is strongest in the vicinity of the SLG and decreases in strength the greater the distance from the SLG. Distribution of the field depends on the layout and geometry of the antennas on the SLG and the MDS. MDS functionality requires a minimum field strength on the MDS achieved at a distance of Sg from the SLG. The figure below shows the transmission window between the MDS and the SLG. 2L ÜL L M M Sa Sg MDS SLG View of the side 2L L M M L View of the top Max. transmission window at approx. 1/2 Sa SLG Transmission window at Sa (The somewhat shorter field length for Sa has already been included in the calculation formula in chap. 3.1.2) M: Midpoint of the transmission window Sa: Operating distance Sg: Limit distance (The limit distance is the maximum clearance between the top of the SLG and the top of the MDS at which the transmission will still function under normal conditions.) L: Length of a transmission window for vertical direction of movement of the MDS 2L: Length of a transmission window for horizontal direction of movement of the MDS Remember that a transmission hole (ÜL) exists in the middle of the window. When an MDS stops there, it cannot be processed. ÜL: The transmission gap is located between the two transmission windows. Processing with the MDS in this area is not possible. The transmission gap is several millimeters in length. ÜL will be disregarded in the rest of this chapter (i.e., ÜL = 0 mm). Figure 3-1 Transmission window MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-3 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines The shape of the active field corresponds to two symmetrically positioned circles (cf. view of top). The strength of the field drops (i.e., transmission gap) in the area of the symmetry axis of the SLG. The direction of movement and rotation of the MDS can be disregarded (exception: MDS 402, 403 and 507). The above figure also shows that operation in the area between Sa and Sg is possible. The greater the distance, the smaller the active working area becomes until it is reduced to one point at distance Sg. For this reason, only static operation should be used in the area between Sa and Sg. Moving the MDS over both transmission windows produces an active length of 2L. 2L can be substituted for L in the formula for the transmit period (see chap. 3.1.2). In actual practice, a precisely doubled transmit period does not occur (see chap. 3.2). The following points must be considered when configuring the system. Note Data transmission can be briefly interrupted in the area of the symmetry axis of the SLG. This interruption is transparent for the user. Execution of the interrupted command is automatically continued as soon as the MDS arrives in the second active area. The duration of the interruption can be any length of time. This is the case when the MDS stops prcisely on the symmetry axis. The user can determine this with the presence signal (i.e., ANW) which can disappear in the transmission gap. The presence signal can be scanned by the user. This signal shows whether an MDS is currently located in one of the two transmission windows. Working in static operation The greatest operating distance (Sg) is achieved vertically over the midpoint (M) of the transmission window. Figure 3-2 illustrates this distance at which transmission is still possible. MDS Transmission window M Sg SLG 1/2 L Figure 3-2 Working in static operation The optimum distance between the two symmetry axes is 1/2L. The “transmission gap” in the middle of the SLG can be disregarded. 3-4 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Working in dynamic operation Transmission window ÏÏÏÏÏ ÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ SLG M MDS Horizontal M MDS Vertical Figure 3-3 Width of the transmission window Working in dynamic operation The following approximation formula applies to practical applications. B + 0.4 @ L B: Width of the transmission window L: Length of the transmission window The width of the transmission window (B) is particularly important for the tolerance of mechanical tracking. When B is maintained, the formula can be used without restriction for the transmit period. The active area can be represented as shown below. Vertical direction of movement Direction of movement of the MDS L M B Figure 3-4 Vertical direction of movement This direction of movement does not produce a “gap” in data transmission. The presence signal (i.e., ANW) precisely indicates the presence of an MDS. This direction of movement is always recommended when the configuration permits. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-5 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Horizontal direction of movement B M M Direction of movement of the MDS 2L Figure 3-5 Horizontal direction of movement This direction of movement should only be used when the simple field length (L) is not sufficient for transmission during dynamic operation. The use of the presence check or the evaluation of this signal for control purposes is not recommended in this operation mode. When located in the data transmission “gap” at the symmetry axis, the presence signal could cause control errors in the user program. Transmission window of the MDS 403 The transmission window of the MDS 403 is described in chap. 4.4. Transmission window of the MDS 507 The transmission window of the MDS 507 is described in chap. 3.6. 3-6 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.2 Transmit Period of the MDS The transmit period is the time during which the MDS is located in the transmission window of an SLG. During this time, the SLG can exchange data with the MDS. The formula used to calculate the transmit period is shown below. tV + L @ 0.8Ä‚[m] VMDSĂƪ mÅ„s Æ« tV: Transmit period of the MDS L: Length of the transmission window (cf. table 3-3) VMDS: Speed of the data memory in dynamic operation 0.8: Constant factor. Compensates for temperature influences and production tolerances. During static operation, the transmit period can be any length of time. The transmit period must last at least as long as necessary to conclude communication with the MDS. During dynamic operation, the transmit period is determined by the system environment. The amount of data to be transferred must be adjusted to the transmit period or vice versa. General formula: t V w tK tV : Transmit period of the data memory in the field of the SLG tK: Communication time between MDS and ASM MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-7 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.3 Communication between ASM, SLG and MDS Communication between ASM, SLG and MDS is asynchronous with a transmission speed of 19200 baud. General formula: t K + K)t Byte @ n 1 Calculation of the maximum amount of user data: n max + 3-8 t V-K t Byte tK: Communication time between ASM, SLG and MDS tV: Transmit period n: Amount of user data in bytes nmax: Maximum amount of user data in bytes during dynamic operation tbyte: Transmission time for 1 byte (cf. table 3-1) K: Constant. The constant represents an internal system time. It contains the time required for power buildup on the MDS and the time required for command transmission (cf. table 3-1). 1 The tK calculation applies to interference-free transmission. When transmission is briefly interrupted due to external interference, the ASM continues the command automatically. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-1 Time constants K and tbyte Constant K [msec] tByte y [[msec]] Data Memory MDS 507 All Other MDSs 66 16 0.8 RAM/FRAM All R/W 66 16 0.8 EEPROM 8 Kbytes R 66 16 3.8 EEPROM 8 Kbytes W 883 383 1.4 RAM/FRAM All R 883 383 1.4 EEPROM 8 Kbytes R 1073 573 1.4 RAM/FRAM All W 1903 1403 4.4 EEPROM 8 Kbytes W 110 60 1 RAM/FRAM All R/W 190 140 1.4 EEPROM 8 Kbytes R 190 140 3.8 EEPROM 8 Kbytes W 190 140 2.6 RAM/FRAM All R 190 140 3.0 RAM/FRAM All W 270 220 3.5 EEPROM 8 Kbytes R 330 280 8.6 EEPROM 8 Kbytes W 2 3 4 Memory Type Memory Size Operation2 Operating M d Mode Normal operation ECCoperation4 Filehandler Filehandler with ECC4 Operation: R = Read, W = Write Worst-case values. Usually not reached. ECC operation: The above table does not contain the ASM computing times for error correction of data when MDS is defective. Net capacity of the MDS is reduced. This table applies to all commands. When a user command consists of several subcommands, the formula for tK must be applied to each subcommand. Special features of the MDS 507 When the MDS 507 is used, an additional 50 msec is added to K. This time is required to activate the switch-on logic of the MDS 507. The MDS 507 automatically switches off immediately after each command. tAUS is the time between the last communication with the MDS and its switch-off. t AUS [ 6Ä‚msec MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-9 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines If the MDS is processed with an additional command after switch-off, it requires another switch-on time of K = 50 msec until the command can be executed. MDS switch-off can be avoided by using the permanent presence check (tABTAST = 0). Remember, however, that continuous use of the presence check puts a heavy strain on the dialog battery of the MDS 507. Caution ! If an MDS 507 is subject to strong interference during and after processing, the MDS may not switch off since the dialog battery may have gone dead. Such fields of interference can be caused by incorrectly wired frequency converters or defective motor controllers, for example. Brief interference pulses at intervals of t > 20 msec will not cause the MDS to malfunction. Remarks on the operation mode with filehandler S The time constant K already contains a read and write operation which the filehandler automatically executes when a new MDS arrives. S Read and write operations of the directory and the file allocation table (i.e., FAT) are not included in the above table. These operations are required when something has been changed in the directory area. Examples: – MDS with altered data structure enters the field. – Files are written with data for the first time. – New files are created with “create.” S The following times (in msec) apply to directory operations. Table 3-2 Times for directory operations 8-Kbyte EEPROM Without ECC With ECC 32-Kbyte RAM/FRAM Without ECC With ECC 8-Kbyte RAM/FRAM With-out ECC With ECC Read directory + FAT 580 950 940 1600 580 950 Write directory entry 1 300 310 330 400 220 270 Write directory entry + FAT 1 1190 1260 540 750 410 600 1 These time include the calculation of the checksum of DIR + FAT. Times: 8 KB = 160 msec 32 KB = 270 msec 3-10 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.4 Communication between ASM and User Program The time required for communication between ASM and user depends on the following factors. S Cycle time and type of programmable controller S Software used – Normal mode: FB 41, FB 250, FC 47, FB 47, FB 240, FC 44, FC 45 – Filehandler: FB 230, FC 46, FB 246, FC 56 Communication between the ASM 400 and the user can be divided into three steps. a) The user issues a command and starts it. When the FB is called the next time, the command is transferred to the ASM and is acknowledged by the ASM. b) The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user or the FBs are in wait status. Data communication with the MDS starts as soon as an MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG. The MDS data are stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness. c) Communication of the ASM with the MDS has been concluded. When the FB is called the next time, the read data or the results of a write command are transferred from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finished message. See applicable documentation for the exact communication times between ASM and user. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-11 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.5 Sample Calculation The customer application A conveyor system moves the pallets with the MDS at a maximum speed of VMDS = 2 m/sec. The direction of movement is vertical. The following MOBY I components were selected. S ASM 400 (with FB 250) S SLG 42 S MDS 514 Task: a) Physical specifications are to be provided to the constructor of the plant. b) The maximum number of bytes in dynamic operation is to be provided to the programmer. For technical data of the components, see the tables in chapter 3.2 (“field data of MDS and SLG”). Tolerance of the height allowance of the pallet Direction of movement MDS H 0 < H < Sa 0 < H < 30 mm SLG (View of the side) Figure 3-6 3-12 Tolerances of the height allowance of the pallet MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet Direction of movement of the MDS Middle line of the MDS allowance Tolerance range of the side allowance SLG X1 Symmetry axis of the SLG X2 B Figure 3-7 Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet L: Length of the transmission window B: Width of the transmission window [X1, X2]:Distance of the symmetry axes between MDS and SLG including tolerance range x 1 + 1 L * 1 B + 45Ä‚mm * 18Ä‚mmÄ…x1 + 27Ä‚mm 2 2 x 2 + 1 L ) 1 B + 45Ä‚mm ) 18Ä‚mmÄ…x2 + 63Ä‚mm 2 2 Minimum distance between SLG and SLG See table 3-4 for this value. Minimum distance between MDS and MDS See table 3-3 for this value. D u 800Ä‚mm D u 250Ä‚mm MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-13 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Maximum number of bytes t V + L @ 0.8 + 0.09Ä‚m @ 0.8 + 0.036Ä‚s + 36Ä‚msec VMDS 2Ä‚msec For normal operating mode, see table in chap. 3.1.3 for the values of K and tbyte. K = 16 msec ; tbyte = 0.8 msec Calculation of nmax n max + tV * K + 36Ä‚msec * 16Ä‚msec + 25Ä…n max + 25Ä‚bytes t byte 0.8Ä‚msec Up to 25 bytes can be read while the MDS is passing by in vertical operation. 3-14 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.2 Field Data of MDS and SLG The table below shows the field data of all MOBY I MDS and SLG components. This makes selecting an MDS and an SLG particularly easy. The technical data represent average data and are valid for an ambient temperature of 0 to 50 C, a supply voltage of 22 V to 27 V DC, and metal-free surroundings. Tolerances of " 20% are permitted for production conditions and temperature fluctuations. Additional tolerances apply to the field data when the total voltage range from 20 V to 30 V DC is utilized for the SLG, and/or the entire temperature range is utilized for MDS and SLG. Table 3-3 MDS SLG SLG 40 SLG 40-S SLG 413 SLG 41C SLG 42 SLG 43 SLG 44 SIM 4x 1 2 3 Field data of all MDS and SLG components MDS 514 MDS 404 L – – 36 30 90 140 – 60 2L – – 72 60 180 260 – 80 SLG 40 SLG 40-S SLG 413 SLG 41C SLG 42 SLG 43 SLG 44 SIM 4x – – 15 12 36 60 – 20 SLG 40 SLG 40-S SLG 413 SLG 41C SLG 42 SLG 43 SLG 44 SIM 4x – – 0 to 12 0 to 12 0 to 30 0 to 50 – 0 to 20 MDS 506 MDS 439 E MDS 401 MDS 402 Length of the Transmission Window in mm (L) L 2L L 2L L 2L – – – – Ld = 182 – – – – Ld = 92 – – – – 30 50 – – – – 20 40 120 190 120 210 – – 220 400 190 330 – – – – – – – – 85 100 75 100 – – Width of the Transmission Window in mm (B) – – Ld = 182 – – Ld = 92 – – 12 – – 8 48 48 – 88 76 – – – – 30 30 – Operating Distance in mm (Sa) – – 2 to 8 – – 2 to 6 – – 0 to 6 – – 0 to 6 10 to 35 10 to 55 – 20 to 100 20 to 80 – – – – 0 to 25 0 to 25 – MDS 403 MDS 507 L1 – – 65 65 110 – – 80 L1 – – – – – – 1200 – – – 25 25 50 – – 45 – – – – – – 300 – – – 4 to 15 4 to 15 10 to 30 – – 0 to 25 – – – – – – 100 to 800 – Caution: The MDS 507 and MDS 403 must be positioned based on the direction. The geometry of the transmission window differs from the other MDSs. Cf. chap. 3.6 or 4.4. Ld: Due to the special characteristics of the antenna of the MDS 402/401, a round transmission window is produced when used with the SLG 40. In static operation, a maximum median deviation Lm of " 9 mm is permitted. Also applies to the SLG 41-S MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-15 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-3 MDS SLG 3 Field data of all MDS and SLG components MDS 514 MDS 404 SLG 40 SLG 40-S SLG 413 SLG 41C SLG 42 SLG 43 SLG 44 SIM 4x 25 25 60 90 33 SLG 40 SLG 40-S SLG 413 SLG 41C SLG 42 SLG 43 SLG 44 SIM 4x > 90 > 90 > 250 > 500 > 200 MDS 506 MDS 439 E MDS 401 MDS 402 Limit distance in mm (Sg) 10 8 10 10 70 70 150 125 40 33 Distance from MDS to MDS in mm (D1) > 50 > 50 > 80 > 80 > 300 > 500 > 600 > 600 > 300 > 300 - MDS 403 MDS 507 30 30 80 40 1000 - > 120 > 120 > 200 > 200 > 4000 - Also applies to the SLG 41-S Table 3-4 Minimum distance from SLG to SLG in mm (D) SLG SLG SLG 40/40-S SLG 41/41-S/41C SLG 42 SLG 43 SLG 44 SIM 4x SLG 40 SLG 40-S > 50/80 - SLG 41 SLG 41-S SLG 41C > 200 > 800 > 2000 > 6000 > 700 SLG 42 SLG 43 SLG 44 SIM 4x > 800 > 800 > 2000 > 6000 > 800 > 2000 > 2000 > 2000 > 6000 > 2000 > 6000 > 6000 > 6000 > 6000 > 6000 > 700 > 800 > 2000 > 6000 > 700 Note Adherence to the values specified in table 3-4 is essential. There is a danger of affecting inductive fields if the values are underranged. This would increase the time for data transmission incalculably or a command would be terminated with errors. 3-16 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.3 MOBY I Dialog How it works During the MOBY I dialog, one ASM exchanges data with another ASM while both SLGs are in the transmission window. When parameterizing the two ASMs, always make sure that one ASM uses normal mode (station_N) and the other uses dialog mode (station_D). As soon as the ASM for dialog mode is parameterized as such, a memory area is created there called VMDS (see figure 3-8). The VMDS is then used for communication memory. Its setup is like a dual port RAM. Station_N and station_D can be read and write accessed in the same way on the VMDS. Station_D supplies data to the VMDS (write access). These data are read by station_N as soon as both SLGs meet. Dialog setup Figure 3-8 shows the setup of dialog communication with MOBY I. Station_D Station_N MOBY I interface in normal operation (e.g., ASM 400 in SIMATIC S5) MOBY I interface in dialog operation (e.g., ASM 470 in SIMATIC S7) ÒÒÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÒÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÒÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ VMDS Read or write the VMDS with FB 250 SLG_N Read/write/ initialize the VMDS with FC 47 SLG_D Station_N reads/writes the VMDS via clearance in air Figure 3-8 Dialog setup for MOBY I MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-17 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-5 Designation Communication time during dialog Definition of terms Explanation Station_N Normal ASM of MOBY I (all MOBY ASMs as per chap. 6) Station_N is used by the user in the normal manner (i.e., as if the user wanted to exchange data with an MDS). SLG_N An SLG (SLG 41, SLG 42, SLG 43 and SLG 44) which is connected to station_N Station_D Dialog ASM of MOBY I (ASM 400, ASM 410 and ASM 470) When switched on by a user command, station_D is parameterized as the dialog ASM. During parameterization, a 16-Kbyte memory area is defined on station_D. This memory is called the VMDS (i.e., virtual MDS). It is used for communication storage. Processing of station_D by the user is identical to the program in station_N. Station_D uses the same tools as station_N (e.g., FC 47). SLG_D An SLG (SLG 41, SLG 42, SLG 43 and SLG 44) which is connected to station_D VMDS Virtual mobile data memory = VMDS. The VMDS is a 16-Kbyte memory area (ASM 452 = 1280 bytes) on station_D. When station_D is turned on and parameterized, the VMDS is defined and cleared. When configuring the communication time, the same times apply as described in chap. 3.1.3. t k + 16Ä‚msec)0.8Ä‚msec @ n byte 3-18 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Transmission window during dialog The transmission window from SLG_D to SLG_N has a polarization direction (i.e., SLG_D and SLG_N must be directed towards each other at certain angles). Figure 3-9 shows the transmission window during dialog. SLG_D Sg Sa Direction of movement of SLG_D to SLG_N SLG_N L View of the side View of the top B Enlargement of the transmission window Positioning of SLG_D when SLG_D and SLG_N are working (tolerance) at a minimum operating distance Transmission window sa = Operating distance sg = Limit distance L = Length of the transmission window B = Width of the transmission window Figure 3-9 Field data during dialog operation Transmission window during dialog Table 3-6 shows the field data during dialog operation. Dimensions are given in millimeters. Table 3-6 Field data during dialog operation All dimensions in mm SLG 41SLG 41 SLG 42SLG 42 SLG 43SLG 43 SLG 44SLG 44 Length of the transmission window (L) 60 230 600 3000 Width of the transmission window (B) 30 80 280 1300 0 to 15 0 to 70 20 to 250 200 to 1000 30 130 450 2500 > 200 > 800 > 2000 > 10000 Operating distance (sa) Limit distance (sg) Distance from SLG to SLG (D) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-19 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4 Presentation of Speed to Amount of Data The curves shown here will simplify selection of MOBY I MDS and SLG components for dynamic operation. Information from the table in chapter 3.1.3 was used to calculate the curves. The curves apply to vertical operation with a single length of the transmission window (L). V MDS (m/s) (m/min) MDS 514 / MDS 404 (Read/Write) 1,66 100 1,33 80 1 60 0,66 40 0,33 20 MDS 403 (Read/Write) 0 0 0 Figure 3-10 10 20 30 4 3,5 60 70 80 90 Number of bytes (n) MDS 514 / MDS 404 (Read/Write) (m/min) 240 210 3 180 2,5 150 2 120 1,5 90 1 60 0,5 30 0 MDS 403 (Read/Write) MDS 506 (Read/Write) 0 0 Figure 3-11 3-20 50 SLG 41 (vertical operation) V MDS (m/s) 40 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Number of bytes (n) SLG 42 (vertical operation) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 4 240 3.5 210 3 180 2.5 150 2 120 1.5 90 1 60 0.5 30 0 MDS 514/MDS 404 (Read/Write) MDS 506 (Read/Write) 0 0 Figure 3-12 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 Number of bytes (n) 270 SLG 43 (vertical operation) V MDS (km/h) (m/s) 57.6 16 50.4 14 43.2 12 36 10 28.8 8 21.6 6 14.4 4 7.2 2 0 0 MDS 507 (Read/Write) 0 Figure 3-13 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Number of bytes (n) SLG 44 (data quantity at low speed) V MDS (km/h) (m/s) 57.6 16 50.4 14 43.2 12 36 10 28.8 8 21.6 6 14.4 4 7,2 2 0 0 MDS 507 (Read/Write) 0 Figure 3-14 10 20 30 40 50 Number of bytes (n) SLG 44 (enlarged section of figure 3-13) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-21 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5 Installation Guidelines The MDS and SLG are devices which work with induction. Every type of metal, particularly iron and ferromagnetic materials, in the vicinity of these devices influences their field geometry. To ensure that the field data described in chapter 3.2 retain their validity, several points must be adhered to when configuring and installing the devices. S Minimum distance between two read/write devices. See data sheets of the SLG. S Minimum distance between two adjacent data memories. See data sheets of the MDS. S Metal-free area with flush installation of SLG and MDS in metal S Installation of several SLGs in metal frames or carriers The next few chapters describe how installation in metallic surroundings affects the identification system. 3-22 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.1 Definition of the Metal-Free Area Installation on metal carriers When an MDS or SLG is mounted directly on metal, no attention must usually be paid to additional metal-free areas. The physical height of the MDS/SLG housing ensures a sufficient distance between the antenna and the metal. However, the technical characteristics Sg, Sa and L can be reduced by up to 50% when the MDS is mounted on metal objects whose dimensions are greater than those of the MDS. Although the formula for the transmit period (see chapter 3.1.2) includes a constant factor for such effects, you should counteract a reduction of the transmission window when critical applications are involved. The following solutions are open to you. S Installation on plastic holder (see figure 3-15) S Installation of MDS at a 8 to 20-mm distance from the metal (e.g., plastic washer) S Keep the metal plate for the holder as small as possible Metal Non-metal Figure 3-15 Installation on metal carrier MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-23 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Flush installation Flush installation of MDS and SLG in metal is also permitted. However, minimum distances between the edge of the housing and the metal must be maintained. b b a h a a, b: Metal-free distances Metal h: Physical height of MDS or SLG = height of the metal-free area Figure 3-16 Flush installation Table 3-7 Dimensions for flush installation Dimensions in mm a b h MDS 404/514 10 10 20 MDS 402 10/0* 10 15 MDS 403 10 10 15 MDS 401 10/0* – 9 MDS 506 40 40 40/60** MDS 507 40 40 40 MDS 439 E 40 40 60 SLG 40/40-S 10 – 10 SLG 41/41-S 25 25 40 SLG 41C 20 20 30 SLG 42 30 30 40 SLG 43 >50 >30 40/60** SLG 44 80 40 40/60** SIM 4x 30 30 40 * See MDS description in chap. 4 ** Recommended value 3-24 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.2 Effects of Metal on the Transmission Window As already described in chapter 3.5.1, installation on metal can reduce the size of the transmission window. The midpoint is shifted to the middle of the SLG. The figures below illustrate this point. Installation of the SLG on metal In figure 3-17, a 30 x 30-cm iron plate is used as the mounting plate. The surroundings of the MDS are free of metal. SLG 41 with MDS 514: SLG 42 with MDS 514: Sa = 12 mm Sa = 30 mm ÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ M 20 mm M SLG 43 with MDS 506: Sa = 80 mm ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈ ÎÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈ ÎÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ M 45 mm M When SLG 41 is mounted on metal, virtually no reduction of the transmission window can be detected. When SLG 42 and SLG 43 are mounted at a 20-mm distance to the metal, the transmission window achieves the normal size. Effects of field length L: = 100% = 100% = 98% ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ = 100% = 100% = 90% M 115 mm M = 100% = 100% = 90% Normal size of the transmission window Transmission window after mounting the SLG at a 20-mm distance to metal (as recommended in the catalog) Transmission window after mounting the SLG on metal Figure 3-17 Mounting the SLG on metal MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-25 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Mounting the MDS on metal In figure 3-18, a 30 x 30-cm iron plate is used as the mounting plate. The SLG is operated in a metal-free environment. SLG 41 with MDS 514: SLG 42 with MDS 514: Sa = 12 mm Sa = 30 mm ÈÈÈ ÏÏÏ ËËË ÏÏÏ ËËË ÈÈÈ ËËË ÈÈÈ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ËËË ÈÈÈ ÏÏÏ ËËË ÈÈÈ ÏÏÏ ËËË ÈÈÈ M SLG 43 with MDS 506: Sa = 80 mm ËËËËË ÏÏÏÏÏ ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËË ÎÎÎ ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËË ÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈ ÎÎÎ ÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËË M 20 mm M ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ËËËËËËËË ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ M 33 mm 1 45 mm M 100 mm 1 115 mm M Effects of field length L: = 100% = 95% = 85% = 100% = 96% = 80% = 100% = 90% = 75% Normal size of the transmission window Transmission window after mounting the MDS at a 20-mm distance to metal Transmission window after mounting the MDS on metal 1 Figure 3-18 3-26 When the MDS (or MDS and SLG) is mounted directly on metal, the midpoint of the field is shifted to the value shown. Mounting the MDS on metal MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Effects of various metals on the field data Table 3-8 Table 3-8 provides a summary of the figures shown on the preceding pages in tabulated format. Details describing the effect of various metals on the SLG and MDS have been added. Reduction of the field data due to metal. Specifications in % as related to non-metal Sg, Sa, L, B [%] Mounted on metal SLG 41 / MDS 514 SLG MDS SLG +MDS SLG 42 / MDS 514 SLG MDS SLG +MDS SLG 43 / MDS 506 SLG MDS SLG +MDS Reference non-metal 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Iron Direct 100 80 75 75 75 50 65 85 50 20 mm distance 100 95 90 95 100 85 95 90 95 Aluminum Direct 100 80 75 65 80 55 65 85 50 20 mm distance 100 95 95 95 100 90 95 95 95 Copper Direct 100 75 80 75 85 65 75 75 50 20 mm distance 100 100 95 100 95 95 100 90 90 S The table applies to a 30 x 30-cm metal plate. Reduction of the metal plate to a minimum size will improve the field data. S Flush installation of components in metal reduces the field data further. A test is recommended when critical mounting configurations are involved. S When working in one of the two transmission windows, it must be en- sured that no metal rail (or similar) is located in the second transmission window. The metal rail would also reduce the limit distance or the field length. S Remember that metal will shift the midpoint of the field to the middle of the SLG. S Distances of 40 mm or more to metal have virtually no more effect on the field. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-27 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.3 Reduction of Metallic Effects Interfering metal carriers Metal carrier Non-metallic spacer Sheet metal ÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ MDS Sa ÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ MDS Figure 3-19 3-28 Bad A metal carrier is located over the second transmission window of the SLG. This carrier affects the entire field. Particularly the transmission window between SLG and MDS is reduced. Metal Good The transmission window is no longer affected when the SLG is mounted differently. Interfering metal carriers MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Flush installation Non-metallic spacer Sheet metal ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Metal ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÓÓÓ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓÓ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ 10-30 mm x > 70 mm ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÏÏÏ ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Figure 3-20 Although flush installation of MDS and SLG is generally possible, the size of the transmission window is sharply reduced. The following measures can be used to counteract reduction of the window. Metal Enlargement of the non-metallic spacer under the MDS and/ or SLG. MDS and/or SLG are 10 to 30 mm higher than the metallic surroundings. The value x > 70 mm applies to the SLG 42 and SLG 43. This value specifies that, at a distance of x > 70 mm, the SLG is no longer noticeably affected by the metal. Enlargement of non-metallic distances a and b The following rules of thumb apply. S Select a and b increased with a factor of 2 to 3 S For SLG/MDS with large limit distance (SLG 43/MDS 506), enlargement of a and b has more effect than for SLG/MDS with small limit distance. S This measure is not necessary for SLG 44/MDS 507. Flush installation MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-29 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Installation of several SLGs on metal frame or carrier Every SLG which is mounted on metal couples part of the field on the metal carrier. When minimum distance D is maintained and metal-free areas a and b are adhered to, there are usually no effects. However, when the location of an iron frame is particularly poor, there may be some effects. This will lengthen data transmission times or causes sporadic error messages on the interface. This point is particularly important when a long-range SLG is used (i.e., SLG 43/44). Necessary actions a) Using the service and test device and the “HELP” key + “A,” the presence of an inductive interference field can be proven. An LED on the SLG 44 indicates the presence of such a field of interference. ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ SLG A D SLG B STG Only SLG A is active. In the vicinity of SLG B, the field is measured on the metal carrier. When an interference field appears on the display, the following measures can be used to correct the situation. b) Lengthen distance D between the two SLGs c) Turn one or both SLGs by 90°. This rotates the inductive fields so that they can no longer affect each other. ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ 3-30 SLG A D ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ SLG B is rotated by 90°. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines ! Caution Turning the SLG alters the physical mounting of the MDS. d) Install one or more iron struts to short circuit the parasitic fields SLG A ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ SLG B e) Install a non-metallic spacer of 20 to 40 mm in thickness between the SLG and the iron frame. This significantly reduces parasitic coupling of the field on the carrier. ÎÎÎ ÎÎ MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Non-metallic spacer ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ 3-31 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.4 Using Side Lobes In addition to the arrangement of MDS and SLG as described in chapter 3.1, other arrangements within the transmission window are possible. With some applications (e.g., assembly lines), this can help simplify a plant. The following example shows how an MDS is processed from two different sides. SLG 41-S Transmission window via side lobe ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ SLG 41-S Normal transmission window ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Pallet ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Pallet SLG 41 Transmission window via side lobes MDS 403 Standing MDS 403 Reclining Conveyor technology SLG 41 Normal transmission window (use of width B of the transmission window) MDS 404 Pallet ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ SLG 41 Normal transmission window Figure 3-21 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Pallet SLG 41 Transmission window via side lobe Conveyor technology Assembly line with MDS 403 reclining or standing (top) and MDS 404 (bottom) The size of the side lobes can as large as the normal transmission window. However, remember that a metallic environment greatly affects the size and location of the side lobes. We recommend determining the side lobes with a test setup in an actual environment (e.g., pallet). 3-32 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.5 Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Carriers Polyamide Table 3-9 provides an overview of chemical resistance of data memories made of polyamide 12. It should be emphasized that the plastic housing is very resistant to chemicals found in the automotive sector (e.g., oils, grease, diesel fuel, gasoline and so on) which are not listed separately here. Table 3-9 Chemical resistance of data memories made of polyamide 12 Concentration 20° C 60° C 30 F j J J Conc. J J 10 J J Benzine J Y Bleaching lye (12.5% chlorine solution) F j Butane, gaseous, liquid J J Butyl acetate (acetic acid butylester) J J n-butyl alcohol (n-butanol) J Y Calcium chloride, w. J Y J Y Chorine j j Chrome baths, tech. j j Battery acid Ammonia, gaseous Ammonia, w. Calcium nitrate, w. k.g. Ferrous salts, w. k.g. J J Acetic acid, w. 50 j j Ethyl alcohol, undenatured 96 J Y 50 J J 30 Y j 10 J Y Formalin Y j Glycerin J J Isopropanol J Y J J F j Formaldehyde, w. Caustic potash solution, w. 50 Lysol Magnesium salts, w. k.g. J J Methyl alcohol, w. 50 J J Lactic acid, w. 50 F j 10 Y F k.g. J J Sodium carbonate, w. (soda) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-33 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-9 Chemical resistance of data memories made of polyamide 12 Concentration 20° C 60° C k.g. J J J J J J Y F f V Propane J J Mercury J J Sodium chloride, w. Sodium hydroxide Blue salts, w. k.g. Nitrobenzene Phosphoric acid 10 Nitric acid 10 f j Hydrochloric acid 10 f j Slight J J 25 F j 10 Y j Slight J J Carbon tetrachloride J J Toluol J Y J J J J Sulfur dioxide Sulfuric acid Hydrogen sulfide Laundry detergent High Softeners Symbols: J Y F f j w. k.g. 3-34 Resistant Practically resistant Somewhat resistant Slightly resistant Not resistant Hydrous solution Cold saturated MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) The housing of the heat-proof MDS 439 E data memory is made of polyphenylene sulfide (i.e., PPS). The chemical resistance of the data memory is excellent. No known solvent can dissolve this substance below 200° C. Deterioration of the physical characteristics can be observed in hydrous solutions of hydrochloric acid (HCl) and nitric acid (HNO3) at 80° C. Resistance to all types of fuel, including methanol, is very good. The table below provides an overview of the chemicals tested. Table 3-10 Chemical resistance of the MDS 439 E made of polyphenylene sulfide Test Conditions S bt Substance Acetone n-butanol (butyl alcohol) Butanone-2 (methylethylketone) n-butyl acetate Brake fluid Calcium chloride (saturated) Diesel fuel Diethyl ether Freon 113 Anti-freeze Kerosene Methanol Motor oil Sodium chloride (saturated) Sodium hydroxide (30%) Sodium hypochlorite (5%) Caustic soda (30%) Nitric acid (10%) Hydrochloric acid (10%) Sulfuric acid (10%) (10%) (30%) Test fuels (FAM-DIN 51604-A) Toluol 1, 1, 1-trichloroethane Xylene Zinc chloride (saturated) Evaluation: E l ti Evaluation Time [Days] Temperature [° C] 180 180 180 180 40 40 180 40 40 180 40 180 40 40 180 30 180 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 180 55 80 60 80 80 80 80 23 23 120 60 60 80 80 80 80 80 93 23 80 23 80 23 80 80 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + / – + + – + / + + / 180 80 + 180 180 180 40 80 75 80 80 / + + + + Resistant, weight gain < 3% or weight loss < 0.5% and/or drop in resistance to tearing < 15% / Somewhat resistant, 3 to 8% weight gain or 0.5 to 3% weight loss and/or 15 to 30% drop in resistance to tearing – Not resistant, weight gain > 8% or weight loss > 3% and/or drop in resistance to tearing > 30% MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-35 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.6 Configuration with MDS 507 and SLG 44 3.6.1 Configuring the Presence Check Since the MDS 507 requires current from the dialog battery for communication with the SLG 44, the MDS should only be processed when a data transfer is actually to be performed. If the user uses the presence check or the filehandler, there is a danger that the MDS 507 battery will be drained in a short time. This is particularly true when the MDS 507 stops opposite the SLG and remains there. The MDS battery would be dead in a few weeks. For this reason, the ABTAST parameter was introduced for the MDS 507. ABTAST is a time interval which should be configured realistically. A sample configuration is shown on the next few pages. Function S When no MDS is in the field, the field is continuously scanned for an MDS as before. This ensures that an MDS command will be processed immediately when the MDS enters the transmission window. S When an MDS has been detected (i.e., MDS present), the surroundings of the SLG are only scanned cyclically for an MDS. At the time intervals specified by ABTAST, the ASM inquires whether the MDS is still present. S When the MDS has left the field, continuous scanning begins again, and a new MDS is detected immediately. S When the user sends an MDS command, this command is processed immediately with the MDS regardless of ABTAST. Note If the MDS is removed from the field and a new MDS enters while the ABTAST time is running, the ASM does not detect a change in presence and this information is not forwarded to the user. Sample configuration of ABTAST A train consists of several cars. An MDS is attached to the middle of each car. Each car must be clearly identified (i.e., the user must be able to detect the “non-presence” of an MDS after an MDS has left the field but before the next MDS enters the field of the SLG). Since the train, and thus the MDS, may remain stopped opposite an SLG for a very long period of time, MDS dialog battery discharging should be optimized. 3-36 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines L MDS ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ SLG S1min Vmax S1min L = = = 50 km/h 20 m 2m tNANW = 80 msec tABTAST Figure 3-22 Maximum speed of the train at which the MDS is processed Shortest distance between two data memories Field length of the SLG with the MDS 507. Contrary to general configuration guidelines, the maximum possible field length of the SLG should be used here. Time which the system requires to detect and report (constant) the “non-presence” of an MDS Maximum time to be configured between two scanning intervals between MDS and SLG Sample configuration of tABTAST: Train with several cars The following relationship exists. t ABTAST v S1min * L * t NANW V max t ABTAST v 20Ä‚m * 2Ä‚m * 0.08Ä‚ sec + 1.296Ä‚ sec * 0.08Ä‚ sec 50Ä‚kmÅ„h t ABTAST v 1.2Ä‚ sec With this configuration, the MDS is processed at intervals of 1.2 sec for a duration of 20 msec. If the MDS remains in front of the SLG for an entire day, the MDS is only processed for the following time during one day. t + 0.02Ä‚s @ 24Ä‚h + 0.4Ä‚h + 24Ä‚ min 1.2Ä‚s The battery of the MDS is only used 24 minutes per day. See also table 3-11. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-37 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines t [ sec ] t ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ Process the MDS Continuously scan field for an MDS The SLG remains off during this time. 1s 13.9 m L = Field length 40 tx Speed triangle The train travels 13.9 m (horizontal) in 1 second (vertical). By connecting the two end points, one obtains the slope of the straight line for VMDS. Additional parallel lines are drawn at the interval of S1 (20 m). Figure 3-23 S b 0 S1min a S1min Direction of movement of the train Diagram of the configuration (drawn to scale) Requirements for maximum tABTAST t ABTAST v t x * t NANW as shown by the diagram: tx 1.3 sec tx = Shown in the diagram: Time after which an MDS has left the field but before the next MDS has entered the field of the SLG a: MDS leaves the transmission window. b: The next MDS enters the transmission window. 3-38 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.6.2 Parameterization of the MDS 507 in the Software Special parameterization of the MDS 507 is required so that the presence check can be set. The value tABTAST must be calculated and then forwarded to the interface module. The time tABTAST is stored in one byte which is coded as shown below. Bit: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 tABTAST : Time value: 00* to 3F hex or 0* to 63 * 0 = Continuous field scanning Time factor: 0 0 = 0.01 sec 0 1 = 0.1 sec 1 0 = 1.0 sec 1 1 = 10 sec t ABTAST + Timefactor * timevalue Figure 3-24 Coding for tABTAST The following table provides several rules of thumb on the actual processing time per day of an MDS which has stopped permanently in front of the SLG. Table 3-11 Time tABTAST Actual processing time of an MDS tABTAST [ H] MDS-Processing1 per Day Min. Life Span of MDS Battery2 (100 h for Continuous Operation) [ Sec ] 0 00 24 h 4.2 days 0.01 01 16 h 6.2 days 0.05 05 9.6 h 10.5 days 0.1 40 4,8 h 20 days 0.5 45 58 min 104 days 1 80 29 min 207 days 5 85 5.8 min 3 years 10 C0 2.9 min > 5 years 3 50 C5 34 s > 5 years 3 100 CA 17 s > 5 years 3 1 2 3 The MDS is turned on for 20 msec for each ANW processing. The values apply to an ambient temperature of Tu = 20° to 30° C. Spontaneous discharge of the battery increases for higher ambient temperatures. With an MDS battery older than 5 years, the life span of the battery is primarily determined by spontaneous discharge of the battery. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-39 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines FB 250 tABTAST is transferred via the FB parameter assignment TYP=3. DB ZUW contains the following parameters. 0401, 0000 tABTAST is specified in the 1st byte of DB DAT (left-hand data byte). ASM 410 With the ASM 410, the MDS 507 is parameterized via the PIO (bit 4 of byte 1). tABTAST is transferred in byte 4 of the PIO during the RESET command. FB 230/FB 246/ FC 46 When FB 230 is called, tABTAST is set with the ABTA parameter. It is transferred as a hex value from 0000 to 00FF. Bit 12 in BEST has the following meaning when used with the MDS 507. 1 = The dialog battery of the MDS 507 has passed below the threshold value. FB 240/FC 44 MDS 507 operation is set via the M507 parameter when FB 240 is called. M507 must be set to 1. tABTAST time is then transferred in the ABTA parameter. FC 47/FB 47 MDS 507 operation is set via the MOBY=2 parameter when FC 47 is called. tABTAST time is then transferred in the ABTA parameter. FC 45 MDS 507 mode is enabled by setting the parameter MOBY_mode = 1 in UDT 10 of the FC 45 project. tABTAST is set with the parameter scanning_time. 3-40 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.6.3 Extended Configuration Aids The transmission window The figure below shows the real transmission window between the MDS 507 and the SLG 44. Field length in millimeters 1400 General conditions: – Sa = 36 cm – SLG with full receiving capacity – Side lobes not shown – Curves show the fields from the middle of MDS to the middle of SLG. 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 Identification of the middle of the field on the SLG ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ Window size in accordance with the standard configuration in the catalog Switch-on window: The MDS reports that it is ready in this window. The MDS must be located in this window so that its presence can be detected. Processing window: After the MDS has been activated in the inner window, the MDS can be processed with commands in this window (i.e., either statically or dynamically). If the MDS has not been processed with a command (or the presence check) for a time of taus > 6 msec, it switches the electronics to standby status. The MDS must be located in the inner window again when another command is processed. SLG 44 0 -200 -400 -600 -800 The MDS can still respond in this window. This field occurs when the MDS is used with the permanent presence check. Since this window has little significance for the user, it has been omitted in the diagrams which follow. -1000 -1200 -1400 -600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 Field width in millimeters Figure 3-25 Real transmission window between the MDS 507 and the SLG 44 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-41 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines This figure shows the middle of the transmission window in accordance with the standard configuration. The real transmission window is usually larger depending on various factors. On the next few pages, the transmission window is shown under different general conditions. The general conditions are listed below. S Operating distance S Main lobe or main and side lobe S Reduction of SLG receiving capacity S Angle deviation Main lobe with different operating distances Sa = 12 cm Sa = 36 cm Field length in mm Sa = 74 cm Field length in mm Field length in mm 1400 1400 1400 1200 1200 1200 1000 1000 1000 800 800 800 600 600 600 400 400 400 200 200 SLG 44 200 SLG 44 SLG 44 0 0 0 -200 -200 -200 -400 -400 -400 -600 -600 -600 -800 -800 -800 -1000 -1000 -1000 -1200 -1200 -1200 -1400 -1400 MDS 507 -600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 -600 -400 -200 Field width in mm Figure 3-26 3-42 -1400 MDS 507 0 200 400 600 Field width in mm MDS 507 -600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 Field width in mm Main lobe with different operating distances MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Main and side lobes with different operating distances Field length 1600 in mm When operating distances are small (i.e., Sa = 100 mm, MDS = 300 mm), the width of the field with main and side lobes is larger than the length of the field. In the vicinity of the SLG, the transmission gap between main and side lobes is no longer detectable. The width of the transmission gap is approx. 2 mm. 1200 800 Sa = 12 cm 400 0 -400 -800 -1200 -1600 -1600-1200-800 -400 0 400 800 1200 1600 Field width in mm 0 400 800 1200 1600 Field width in mm Field length 1600 in mm 1200 800 Sa = 36 cm 400 0 -400 -800 -1200 -1600 -1600-1200-800 -400 Field length 1600 in mm 1200 800 Sa = 74 cm 400 0 No side lobes are visible at an operating distance of Sa > 600 mm. -400 -800 -1200 -1600 -1600-1200-800 -400 Figure 3-27 0 400 800 1200 1600 Field width in mm Main and side lobes with different operating distances MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-43 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Reduction of SLG receiving capacity Under interference-prone industrial conditions, the receiving capacity of the SLG 44 can be reduced. Cf. chap. 3.6.5. The figure below shows the transmission window of an SLG 44 with varying receiving capacities. The switch-on window is shown for each. Field length in mm 1600 Sa = 30 cm 1200 800 400 Min. capacity (left setting on potentiometer)1 0 Middle-left setting on potentiometer1 -400 Middle-right setting on potentiometer -800 Max. capacity (right setting on potentiometer) -1200 1 -1600 -1600 -1200 -800 -400 Figure 3-28 3-44 0 400 800 1200 1600 No side lobes at Sa = 30 cm Field width in mm Switch-on window for various receiving capacities MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Angle deviation Field length in mm When the MDS 507 is used, the antennas of MDS and SLG must be aligned. The following transmission windows result at an angle deviation (Φ). Field length in mm Sa = 36 cm F = 45 _ 1600 1600 1200 1200 800 800 400 400 0 0 -400 -400 -800 -800 -1200 -1200 -1600 Sa = 36 cm F = 90 _ -1600 -1600 -1200 -800 -400 0 400 800 1200 1600 -1600 -1200 -800 -400 0 400 800 Field width in mm Figure 3-29 1200 1600 Field width in mm Switch-on window with various angle deviations Distance D or D1 The following values are specified for the general configuration. D + 6Ä‚m (SLG SLG) D1 + 4Ä‚m (MDS MDS) When these values are adhered to, there are usually no reciprocal influences even when SLG and MDS are installed under poor conditions. However, the actual space available often makes it impossible to adhere to these required minimum distances. It is frequently possible to underrange the minimum distances. Field measurement with suitable measuring instruments may have to be performed. The following tables shows the absolute minimum distances (D). MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-45 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Configuration 1) 2) 3) 4) SLG A D Sg D SLG A D SLG 44 5) Max. sensitivity D MDS SLG A SLG B SLG B SLG A Sg MDS SLG B SLG B 2.4 3.0 3.1 4.2 Middle setting 1.8 1.8 2.9 3.5 Min. sensitivity 0.45 0.45 1.6 2.1 All specifications in meters (m) 1) Both SLGs have the main lobe pointed at each other. When the MDS (not shown) moves from SLG A to SLG B, the configuration shown in column 3 results. 2) Both SLGs have the side lobes pointed at each other. 3) SLG A communicates with the MDS at the boundary of the main lobe. D is the minimum distance at which SLG B stops receiving information from the MDS. The operating distance between MDS and SLG A is only a few centimeters. 4) Setting of the receiving capacity is performed via the potentiometer as described in chapter 3.6.5 The strength of the sending field remains unchanged at the maximum value. Shows the direction of movement of an MDS Sg The MDS is located on the boundary of the SLG. 5) Setting of the receiving capacity is performed via the potentiometer as described in chapter 3.6.5 The strength of the sending field remains unchanged at the maximum value. Applicable in general: S The values in the table are based on non-metallic surroundings. S Installation on metal may increase distance D significantly. S The special definition of D1 (minimum distance MDS ↔ MDS) must be: Two MDSs must never be located in the field of one SLG at the same time. However, it must be remembered that metallic surroundings may increase the limit distance (and thus D1). The transmission windows shown in this chapter can be used for the configuration of D1 (but only when D1 must be < 4 m). S Since the values specified here are subject to tolerances, we recommend configuring all values with + 20%. Processing the MDS 507 with the SLG 42/43 There are 2 modes with which MDS 507 can be processed with SLG 42 or SLG 43. a) The dialog battery on the MDS 507 is okay. S The field of the SLG 42/43 has the same shape as when working with SLG 44. The middle of the field is the middle of the SLG. S MDS 507 is direction-dependent. S The field data of the MDS are sharply reduced in comparison to operation with SLG 44. S Rules of thumb for the limit distance SLG 42 MDS 507: 150 mm SLG 43 MDS 507: 300 mm 3-46 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines ! Caution The distance from MDS to MDS (D1) must have the specified value. If D1 is not adhered to, other MDSs which appear not to be in the field may be processed by mistake. Remember that, when still approx. 1 to 3 m away from the SLG, the MDS 507 is switched on already by the field of the SLG 42/43. The battery of the MDS will be discharged continuously when the MDS is located between the stated Sg and 1 m. Between 1 and 3 m, the MDS can still be switched on occasionally. b) The dialog battery of the MDS 507 is discharged or does not exist. S The MDS 507 can no longer be processed with the SLG 44. S The MDS 507 has a receiving antenna for power transmission (i.e., the MDS can be processed with the SLG 42/43 without a dialog battery). S The data transmission of the MDS 507 is direction-dependent. S Rules of thumb for the limit distance: SLG 42 MDS 507: 70 mm SLG 43 MDS 507: 100 mm Due to the transmission of power to the MDS, the limit distances specified here are much smaller than the values listed under a). S General functionality of the MDS 507 can always be checked in this operating mode. S A dead dialog battery is not reported to the user when the MDS 507 is not positioned in the middle. Cf. figure 3-30. SLG 42 SLG 43 Sa = 25 mm Figure 3-30 Transmission window of the MDS 507 with dead battery MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-47 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.6.4 Dead Battery Measurement and Changing the Battery for MDS 507 Dead battery measurement with the STG sa; sg Dialog battery full: Limit distance Sg is approx. 60 mm. Dialog battery empty: Limit distance Sg is approx. 25 mm. Applicable in general: The dialog battery is okay when MDS can be processed at Sa > 40 mm. Remember: The dead battery message on the display of the STG is only indicated when the MDS is operated in the boundary area of communication (e.g., at Sa = 20 mm). When the MDS is operated close to the STG (e.g., Sa = 10 mm), power transmission from STG to MDS becomes so strong that no dead battery message is displayed even though the battery is actually dead. Figure 3-31 Dead battery measurement with the STG Dead battery measurement with SLG 43 Dialog battery full: Limit distance Sg is approx. 340 mm. Dialog battery empty: Limit distance Sg is approx. 50 to 100 mm. Applicable in general: The dialog battery is okay if the MDS can be processed at Sa > 50 mm and positioning of SLG to MDS is in the middle, and if no dead battery message is indicated. Remember: The dead battery message will not be generated correctly when the MDS is not positioned in the middle. Figure 3-32 3-48 Dead battery message with SLG 43 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Changing the battery a) Unlock the four housing locking mechanisms. b) At the lower ends, press the locks simultaneously towards the inside, and lift the upper part of the housing with the electronics. Note Temperature fluctuations can create a semi vacuum inside the MDS making it difficult to lift the upper part of the housing. If this happens, use a small screw driver to separate the upper part of the housing from the lower part while pressing the locking mechanisms at the same time. c) Open the battery compartment with a crosstip screw driver. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-49 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines d) Using the plug-in terminal, remove the used battery block from the MDS and install the new battery block. Install cable, plug connector and battery in the battery compartment as shown. The battery voltages can be checked as shown in the adjacent drawing. New Battery Red Bad Battery U2 Blue 1 U1 U2 U1 3.1 V 9.3 V < 2.7 V < 7.9 V – RL = 1 kW1 – Black 1 ! White To measure voltage U2, install a load resistor (RL = 1 kΩ) in parallel to the measuring instrument. This is particularly important for bad batteries. Caution Use original replacement batteries only. e) Place cover on battery compartment, and tighten the screws slightly. The clamps on the cover of the battery compartment should now hold the new batteries in place. This can be checked by shaking the MDS. There should be no rattling inside. 3-50 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines f) Place the MDS back on the housing cover (1), and close the locking mechanisms (2). 1 2 g) Before being used again, the MDS 507 must be initialized or formatted. ! Caution The contents of the RAM are lost when the battery is changed. If necessary, the user data can be stored intermediately on an STG. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-51 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.6.5 Reducing the Sensitivity of the SLG 44 The measures described in this chapter are only required when the SLG is receiving excessive interference from other devices. Such interference is indicated by the yellow LED on the SLG. Reducing the receiving capacity A reduction of the receiving capacity should not be necessary when all components of a system adhere to the guidelines on radio technology. The sensitivity of an SLG 44 should not be reduced before system interference is correctly suppressed. To accomplish this, follow the steps below. 1. Install the SLG, and make sure that no MDS is in the vicinity. If the yellow LED goes on, this means that the location at which the SLG is installed is causing interference. The receiving capacity of the SLG must be reduced. 2. Turn the potentiometer counter clockwise until the yellow LED goes off. 3. Move an MDS 507 into the field of the SLG 44. The green LED indicates how great the limit distance still is with reduced sensitivity. Potentiometer to reduce receiving capacity of the SLG Protective cap (removed) Limit Distance at Reduced Sensitivity (Approx. Values) To the right 1m Middle position 0.65 m To the left 0.3 m Factory setting: “To the right” corresponds to maximum sensitivity. Figure 3-33 3-52 Reduction of the receiving capacity of the SLG 44 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines ! Caution The sending strength of the SLG is retained even when the receiving capacity is reduced. This creates an area in the boundary area of the SLG in which the MDS has already been switched on but the SLG cannot yet communicate with the MDS. Measures should be provided in the system to prevent an MDS from remaining overly long in the boundary area of an SLG whose receiving capacity has been reduced. When an MDS does remain in this boundary area for a longer period of time anyway (e.g., several days), premature failure of the MDS battery must be expected. If this happens, the strength of the sending field can be reduced. Since this involves a manipulation of the circuitry, only authorized personnel may perform this task. The procedure is described in the next section. Option: Reduction of the strength of the sending field ! Caution The following procedure involving the circuitry of the SLG 44 may only be performed by authorized personnel. The procedure may only be performed when the voltage is off. The EMC/ ESD protective measures for electronic circuits must be adhered to. Reduction of the strength of the sending field of the SLG 44 may become necessary under one or more of the following conditions. S An MDS remains in the boundary area of a “sensitivity-reduced” SLG for a long period of time. S A second SLG is to be positioned in the immediate vicinity. The receiving capacity of the SLG must have already been reduced as described above before the measures below may be performed. The SLG 44 is always delivered with maximum sending field strength. The sending field strength is reduced by soldering in short-circuit jumpers in the electronics. The following steps must be performed. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-53 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines a) After removing the eight crosstip screws, open the cover of the SLG 44. Figure 3-34 Opening the cover of the SLG 44 b) On the protruding soldering bases (A, B, C and D), solder in 1 to 4 soldered jumpers with an electronics soldering iron. Soldered jumpers for reduction of the sending field strength of the SLG ABCD Service plug connector for programming the SLG Figure 3-35 3-54 Antenna measuring points (An anti-resonance resistor can be soldered in here as an option instead of the soldered jumpers.) Soldered jumpers and antenna measuring points on the SLG 44 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-12 Limit distance Sg for reduced sending field strength Jumper Sg None 1m A+D 0.9 m A+D+B 0.8 m A+D+B+C 0.5 m These limit distances have been measured for an SLG with full receiving capacity. When setting the jumpers, make sure that the range of the sending field strength is smaller than or equal to the receiving range. c) A test should be performed before the SLG is closed again. Several jumper combinations may have to be tested. d) Identification of the hardware status The modified status of the SLG must be marked on the outside. A label with date and jumpers used must be affixed next to the SLG plug connector. Date ... Jumpers: Figure 3-36 Label for identification of the hardware status e) Close the housing as shown below. ! Caution Fulfillment of protection rating IP65 requires that the SLG be provided with a new seal. Carefully place new seal on the cover. Place the SLG on top, and press together. Make sure that the seal is not pinched. Then tighten the screws. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-55 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7 Configuration with MDS 439 E (Heat-Proof) 3.7.1 Temperature Dependency of the Transmission Window With the exception of the limit distance and the field length at temperatures in excess of 85° C, the same guidelines as described in chap. 3.1 for the other MDSs apply to the configuration of heat-proof data memories. For example, the calculation of the transmission window includes the factor 0.8, and the production tolerances and temperature influences up to 85° C have been considered. However, this factor is not a constant. Instead, it is a function of the temperature which must be considered when 85° C (up to 110° C) is exceeded (i.e., when the mean temperature inside the data memory exceeds 85° C, an additional offset factor must be included in the calculation). t v[Tt85Ä‚°Ä‚C] + L @ 0.8 V MDS S g[Tu85Ä‚°Ä‚C] + S g @ C L [Tu85Ä‚°Ä‚C] + L @ C [m ] t v[Tu85Ä‚°Ä‚C] + L @ C @ 0.8 V MDS ƪ mÅ„sec Æ« L Sg VMDS C tV 3-56 = = = = = Field length Limit distance between MDS - SLG Speed of the MDS Offset factor for temperatures > 85° C (cf. figure 3-37) Transmit period of the MDS MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines C [Offset factor] 1,10 1,05 1,00 0,95 0,90 MDS 439 E 0,85 0,80 0,75 0,70 0 Figure 3-37 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 T [° C] Offset factor C in relation to the temperature The following chart shows the reduction of the limit distance and the field length under excessive processing temperatures (i.e., inner temperatures of the MDS). [%] 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 20 Figure 3-38 MDS 439 E 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 Interior temperature [° C] Reduction of field length and limit distance The decrease in field data under high temperatures is caused by the higher current consumption of the electronics. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-57 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7.2 Temperatures During Cyclic Operation Cyclic operation is not required for ambient temperatures up to 110° C (i.e., up to this temperature, the MDS can be used continuously). For ambient temperatures > 110° C, it must be ensured that the interior temperature of the MDS does not exceed the critical threshold (i.e., 110° C). Each period of heating up must be followed by a period of cooling off. Several limit cycles are shown in the following table. Table 3-13 Limit cycles of the temperature for MDS 439 E Tu (Heating Up) Heating Up Tu (Cooling Off) Cooling Off 220° C 0,5 h 25° C >2h 200° C 1h 25° C >2h 190° C 1h 25° C > 1 h 45 min 180° C 2h 25° C >5h 170° C 2h 25° C >4h The interior temperature of the MDS follows an e-function. This makes it possible to calculate in advance the interior temperature or the functionality of the MDS. This is particularly important for applications in which temperature is a critical factor or which work with a complex temperature profile. Note On request, Siemens will calculate the temperature curves. A precise knowledge of the interior temperature simplifies configuration of applications in which temperature is a critical factor. ! Caution Ambient temperatures > 220° C Exposing the data memories to ambient temperatures over 220° C will invalidate all rights to warranty claims. However, physical stability is maintained up to 230° C! 3-58 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Example of a cyclic process Table 3-14 Typical temperature profile of an application in a paint shop Time Duration (Min.) Ambient Temperature (° C) KTL bath 20 30 KTL dryer 60 200 Transport 60 25 PVC dryer 25 170 Transport 60 25 Filler dryer 60 160 Transport 60 25 Base coat dryer 60 120 Transport 60 25 Wax dryer 25 100 Transport 150 25 Start of MDS at i-Point Temperature [_C] KTL dryer 200 PVC dryer Filler dryer 150 Base coat dryer 50 KTL bath 100 Wax dryer 0 0 Figure 3-39 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 [min] Time Diagram of the temperature progression from table 3-14 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-59 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines The results of the simulation are listed below. After a simulation time of 36.5 hours, a total of 3 cycles were passed through, and an interior temperature of 90 degrees Centigrade was reached. Temperature [_C] Maximum interior temperature inside the MDS (in this example) Ambient temperature 200 180 160 Interior temperature of the MDS 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 [min] Time Figure 3-40 3-60 Complete temperature progression during simulation MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7.3 Life Span of the Mobile Data Memory The life span of the data memory is affected by several factors. S Life span of the electronics S Number of temperature cycles S Type of temperature cycles S Number of write-accesses S Aging of the housing S Aging of the heat insulation S Frequency of write-accesses S Data retention time of the EEPROM S Mechanical stress The frequency of write-accesses is the primary factor affecting the life span of the data memory. Operation with ECC driver The ECC driver provides additional security on the correctness of MDS data. The manufacturer of the data memory guarantees only 10,000 write-accesses. When the ECC driver is used, the user is ensured the same data security up to the actual end of the MDS life span. Notes on ECC use S Accesses times to MDS data are increased (i.e., less data can be processed during dynamic operation). S The net capacity of the MDS is reduced. S When a data correction is performed, the result may be delayed by as much as one second. ! Caution Interior temperature > 110° C When the MDS is used at an interior temperature > 110° C, all rights to guarantee claims are invalidated. The data contents of the EEPROM may be lost at interior temperatures > 110° C. An error message is generated during the next processing procedure, and the error status can be corrected by initializing the MDS. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-61 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.8 EMC Guidelines 3.8.1 Foreword The EMC guidelines contain the following information. S Why are the EMC guidelines necessary? S What interference affects the controller from the outside? S How can interference be prevented? S How can interference be corrected? S Which standards apply to the EMC guidelines? S Examples of an interference-suppressed system setup The description is directed to “qualified personnel.” S Configuration engineers and planners who plan system configuration with the MOBY modules and who must adhere to the required guidelines S Skilled personnel and service engineers who install the connection cables based on this description or who can correct deficiencies in this area when a malfunction occurs. ! 3-62 Warning Non-adherence to especially highlighted notes can cause dangerous states in the system or destroy either single components or the entire system. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.8.2 General The continuously growing use of electrical and electronic devices brings with it the following characteristics. S Greater concentration of components S Increasing capacity of power electronics S Rising switching speeds S Lower current consumption of the components The higher the degree of automation, the greater the danger that devices will interfere with one another. Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., EMC) is the ability of a piece of electrical or electronic equipment to function correctly in an electromagnetic environment without interfering with or adversely affecting its surroundings within certain limits. EMC can be divided into three areas. S Intrinsic interference immunity Resistance to internal (i.e., own) electrical interference S Free interference immunity Resistance to external electromagnetic interference S Degree of interference emission Interference emission and effects of the electrical environment All three areas are included in the test of an electrical device. MOBY modules are tested for adherence to certain limit values. Since MOBY modules are only one of many components in a total system and the combination of various components may also create sources of interference, certain guidelines must be adhered to when setting up a system. EMC measures usually consist of an entire package of measures all of which must be taken in order to obtain an interference-immune system. Note S The system provider is responsible for adherence to the EMC guidelines, while the user is responsible for the interference suppression of the complete system. S All measures taken while the system is being set up will eliminate the need for expensive modifications and removal of interference sources later. S Although the regulations of specific countries must also be adhered to, this information is not covered in the documentation. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-63 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.8.3 Spreading of Interference Three factors are required before interference can affect a system. S Source of interference S Coupling path S Potentially susceptible equipment Interference source Ex: A drive Figure 3-41 Coupling path Ex: A MOBY cable Potentially susceptible device Ex: An SLG 43 Spreading of interference If one of these factors is missing (e.g., the coupling path between the source of the interference and the potentially susceptible device), the susceptible device will not be affected even when strong interference is being emitted. The EMC measures affect all three factors to prevent any malfunctions caused by interference. When a system is set up, the provider must take all possible measures to prevent the creation of sources of interference. S Only equipment which meets limit value class A of VDE 0871 may be used in a system. S All interference caused by devices must be suppressed. This includes all coils and windings. S The layout of the cabinet must be such that reciprocal interference of the individual components is avoided or kept as low as possible. S Measures must be taken to eliminate interference from external sources. The next few chapters provide information and tips on how to set up a system. 3-64 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Sources of interference It is necessary to be familiar with the most frequent sources of interference in order to achieve a high degree of electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., a very low degree of interference in the environment) in a system. These sources of interference must be eliminated by taking appropriate measures. Table 3-15 Interference sources: Origin and effects Interference Source Interference Origin Effect on Potentially Susceptible Equipment Contactor, electronic valves l Contacts Power network malfunctions Coils Magnetic field Electric motor Collector Electrical field Winding Magnetic field Contacts Electrical field Transformer Magnetic field, power network malfunction, equalizing currents Power pack, switchedmode Circuit Electrical and magnetic field, power network malfunction High-frequency devices Circuit Electromagnetic field Sender (e.g., industrial radios) Antenna Electromagnetic field Difference in grounding or reference potential Voltage difference Equalizing currents Operator Static charging Electrical discharging currents, electrical field High-voltage current cable Current flow Electrical and magnetic field, power network malfunction High-voltage cable Voltage difference Electrical field Electric welding device MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-65 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Coupling paths A coupling path is required before interference generated by the source can take effect. There are four kinds of interference coupling. I N T E R F E E N C E Galvanic coupling path MOBY ASM o. SLG Capacitive coupling path MOBY ASM o. SLG Inductive coupling path S O U R C E MOBY ASM o. SLG Emission coupling Figure 3-42 MOBY ASM o. SLG P O T E N T I A L L Y S U S C E P T I B L E D E V I C E The four kinds of interference coupling When MOBY modules are used, various components of the total system can act as coupling paths. Table 3-16 Causes of coupling paths Cause Coupling Path Cables and lines Incorrect or unfavorable installation Missing or incorrectly connected shields Cables spaced unfavorably Switching cabinet or SIMATIC housing h i Missing or incorrectly wired equalizing line Missing or incorrect grounding Cables spaced unfavorably Modules not installed securely Poor cabinet layout 3-66 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.8.4 Cabinet Layout User influence on the configuration of an interference-immune system includes the cabinet layout, cable installation, grounding connections and correct shielding of lines. Note For notes on correct cabinet layout in accordance with EMC guidelines, see the layout guidelines of the SIMATIC controller. Shielding via housing Metal housings for potentially susceptible equipment can be used to keep out magnetic and electrical fields and electromagnetic waves. The better the induced interference current can flow, the greater the spontaneous weakening of the field of interference. All sheet metal on the housings or sheet metal in the cabinet must be well connected together (i.e., with a high degree of conductivity). Figure 3-43 Shielding via housing When the sheet metal parts of switching cabinets are insulated against each other, a high-frequency conductive connection with the ribbon cables and high-frequency terminals or HF conductive paste can be created. The greater the connection surface, the better the high-frequency conductive capacity. This cannot be achieved by connection with simple wires. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-67 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Avoiding interference via optimal layout Good interference diversion is achieved by installing SIMATIC controllers on conductive mounting plates (unpainted). When setting up the switching cabinet, interference can be easily avoided by adhering to guidelines. Power components (e.g., transformers, drives and load power supplies) should be installed separately (i.e., separated by space) from the controller components (e.g., relay controllers and SIMATIC S5). The following basic principles apply. 1. The effect of interference decreases, the greater the distance between interference source and potentially susceptible equipment. 2. Interference is further reduced by installing shielding plates. 3. Load lines and high-voltage current cables must be installed separately from the signal lines at a distance of at least 10 cm. PS CPU/EU Shielding plate Drive Figure 3-44 3-68 Avoidance of interference via optimal layout MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Filtering the supply voltage External interference from the power network can be avoided by installing power network filters. In addition to correct dimensioning, proper installation is very important. It is imperative that the power network filter be installed directly at the entrance to the cabinet. Interference currents are filtered out early at the entrance and not conducted through the cabinet. Right Wrong Power filter Is Power filter Is IS = Interference current Figure 3-45 Filtering the supply voltage MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-69 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.8.5 Avoiding Interference Sources Sources of interference in a system must be avoided so that a higher degree of interference immunity can be achieved. All circuited inductivities are a frequent cause of interference in a system. Interference suppression of inductivities Since relays, contactors and so on generate interference voltages, this interference must be suppressed with one of the following circuits. When the coil is switched, up to 800 V can be created on 24 V coils even with small relays. Several kV of interference voltagecan be created on 220 V coils. By using free-wheeling diodes or RC circuitry, the interference voltage is prevented and, with it, the inductive interference in the lines parallel to the coil lines. Relay coils Valves Contactors Brakes Figure 3-46 Suppression of inductive interference Note All coils in the cabinet must be interference-suppressed. Values and motor brakes are frequently forgotten. Fluorescent lamps in the switching cabinet must be subjected to a special test. 3-70 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.8.6 Equipotential Bonding Differing layouts of the system parts and differing voltage levels can cause differences in potential between the parts of a system. When the system parts are connected via signal lines, equalizing currents flow through these signal lines. These equalizing currents can distort the signals. This makes correct equipotential bonding imperative. S The cross section of the equipotential bonding line must be large enough (i.e., at least 10 mm2). S The space between signal cable and related equipotential bonding line must be kept as small as possible (i.e., antenna effect). S A fine-wire line must be used (i.e., better conduction of high frequencies). S When connecting equipotential bonding lines to the central equipotential bonding rail, power components and non-power components must be combined. Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2 Power pack EU Wrong EU EU PLC Wrong Drive Figure 3-47 Equipotential bonding The better the equipotential bonding in a system, the smaller the chance of interference caused by fluctuations in potential. Equipotential bonding should not be confused with the protective grounding of a system. Protective grounding prevents the creation of excessive touch voltages when devices malfunction. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-71 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.8.7 Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY L+ 230 V 24 V R R ASM R R Ungrounded power pack Ground fault monitoring device. When a voltage asymmetry against protective ground occurs on lines L+ or L–, the current circuit is interrupted. Figure 3-48 SLG Interface to the computer or PC To connect a grounded computer or PC, the connection must contain a galvanic decoupler (e.g., optocoupler). Circuit diagram of the principle of grounding fault monitoring SIMATIC with ASM 400/401 3-72 L– The SIMATIC is a grounded system. In the power pack of the SIMATIC, 0 V (i.e., signal ground) is connected to the housing. On the ASM 400/401, the 0 V signal of the external 24 V power pack is connected with 0 V of the SIMATIC. The connection between the ASM 400/401 (SIMATIC) and the SLG is equipotentially bonded (i.e., RS 422 interface without galvanic isolation). A direct setup with grounding fault monitoring is not possible. Proceed as described in the SIMATIC manual if grounding fault monitoring is necessary. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines SIMATIC PLC 100U with ASM 410 ASM 410 C P U PLC 100U SLG Galvanic isolation 230 V 24 V Figure 3-49 Grounding fault monitoring SIMATIC PLC 100U with ASM 410 The ASM 410 is equipped with galvanic isolation to the SIMATIC CPU. A layout with grounding fault monitoring is simple. Serial interface SIM The SIM is available with RS 422, V.24 and TTY interfaces. A layout with grounding fault monitoring requires galvanic isolation (i.e., a layout with the TTY interface). SIM - TTY C P U PLC 100U SLG Galvanic isolation 230 V 24 V Figure 3-50 Grounding fault monitoring Serial interface SIM with TTY interface MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-73 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.8.8 Shielding the Cables To suppress interference in the signal cables, these cables must be shielded. The best shielding effect is achieved by installation in steel piping. However, this is only necessary when the signal lines must pass through an interference-prone environment. In most cases, the use of cables with braided shields is sufficient. In either situation, correct connection is decisive for the shielding action. Note A shield which is not connected at all or is connected incorrectly has no shielding effect. The following principles apply. S For analog signal lines, the shield connection must be one-sided and on the receiver side. S For digital signal lines, the shield connection must be two-sided on the housing. S Since interference signals are frequently in the HF range (i.e., > 10 kHz), connection of the HF-capacity shield must be provided over a large surface. Figure 3-51 Shielding of the cables The shield rail must be connected to the housing of the switching cabinet over a large surface (i.e., good conductivity) and must be located as close to the cable lead-in as possible. The cables must be bared and clamped (highfrequency clamp) to the shield rail or bound with cable binders. The position must have good conductivity. 3-74 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Cable binder Remove paint Figure 3-52 Connection of the shield rail The shield rail must be connected with the protective ground (PE) rail. When shielded cables must be interrupted, the shield must also be applied to the plug connector housing. Only suitable plug connectors may be used. Shield turned up backwards by 180° and connected with the plug connector housing ÔÔÔÔÔ ÖÖÖÖ ÖÖÖÖ Figure 3-53 Rubber sleeve Interruption of shielded cables When adapter plugs which do not have suitable shield termination are used, the shield must be continued through cable clamps to the point of interruption. This ensures a large-surface, HF conductive connection. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-75 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.8.9 Basic Rules on EMC Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., EMC) can often be ensured by following a few elementary rules. Rules which apply to the layout of the cabinet are listed below. Shielding via housing S Protect the programmable controller from external interference by installing it in a cabinet or housing. The cabinet or the housing must be included in the grounding connection. S Shield electromagnetic fields of inductivity from the programmable controller with separator plates. S Use metallic plug housings for shielded data transmission lines. Large-surface grounding connection S Connect all inactive metal parts with low HF resistance over a large surface. S Provide a large-surface connection between the inactive metal parts and the central grounding point. S Remember to connect the shield rail to ground (i.e., a large-area connection of the shield rail to ground must be provided). S Aluminum parts should not be used for grounding connections. Planning the cabling S Organize the cables into groups, and install these groups separately. S Always install high-voltage current lines and signal lines in separate ducts or bundles. S Introduce all cabling into the cabinet from only one side and, if possible, at one level. S Install the signal lines as close to the grounding surfaces as possible. S Twist the feeder and return conductors of individually installed conductors. 3-76 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Shielding the lines S Shield the data transmission lines, and apply the shield on both sides. S Shield the analog lines, and apply the shield on one side (e.g., on the drive). S Always apply the line shields at the cabinet entrance to the shield rail over a large surface, and secure these with clamps. S Continue the applied shield without interruption to the module. S Use braided shields and not foil shields. Power supply and signal filter S Only use power supply filters with metal housings. S Connect the filter housing (i.e., connection must be low HF resistant and over a large surface) to cabinet ground. S Never secure the filter housing to painted surfaces. S Secure the filter at the cabinet entrance or in the direction of the interference source. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-77 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.9 Concept of MOBY Shielding With MOBY I, the data are transferred between ASM and SLG over an RS 422 interface at a speed of 19200 baud. The distance between ASM and SLG may be up to 1000 m. MOBY cable installation should be treated the same as that of a data processing system. Special attention should be paid to shielding of all data cables. The following figures show the primary points required for a secure layout. Ï Ï Grounding rail for all shielded cables. It must be located as close as possible to the cable lead-in in the cabinet. The rail must be grounded to the cabinet over a large surface and use short connections. Additional SLGs The cable shield is applied to the SLG plug connector on the appropriate shield pin. The cable shield of the SLG may not be applied to a grounded point (i.e., no grounding clamp). 230 V 24 V Additional power consumers Each cabinet is centrally grounded. The cable jacket of the SLG cables must be bared directly at the cable lead-in. A shield clamp is used for the connection of the cable shield to the grounding rail. This will divert interference volThe voltage supply of the SLGs should be provided by the tages of + 2.5 kV on the SLG cable. Careful shield 2-pole plug connector on the ASM. The ASM is equipped connection is particularly important for long cables with electrical fuses and a filter circuit against interference or interference-prone industrial environments. peaks. This filters out interference peaks and frequencies which may be caused by “additional power consumers.” Figure 3-54 3-78 Simple layout with ASM 400/401 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Layout of an S7-300 with MOBY When connecting the SLG to the ASM 470/475, it is essential that a shield connection terminal be used for the cable shield. Shield connection terminals and holders are standard components of the S7-300 product family. Shield connecting element Shield connection terminal Cable to SLG 1 Figure 3-55 Connection of other modules (e.g., ASM 410) Cable to SLG 2 Layout of the ASM 470/475 with shield connecting element To divert interference which may occur on the connection cable to the SLG, proceed as described for the ASM 400. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-79 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.10 Cable and Plug Connector Assignments The cable jacket of SLG connection cables used with MOBY is made of polyurethane (i.e., PUR in accordance with VDE 0250). This ensures very good cable resistance to oils, acids, caustic solutions and hydraulic fluids. 3.10.1 Cable Configuration The cable between ASM and SLG requires six cores + shield. Four of these cores are assigned to the serial data interface. The power supply of the SLG requires two cores. The data can be transferred over distances of up to 1000 m, almost without regard to the diameter of the wire. Since voltage is present on the connection cable due to the current consumption of the SLG, permitted cable lengths are usually shorter than 1000 m. The length depends on the current consumption of the SLG and the ohmic resistance of the connection cable. Please also observe the information in chapter 6.8 “Setup and Function” when using a Serial Interface Module (SIM). The following table gives an overview of permissible cable lengths. Table 3-17 Cable configuration ConResisSLG 40/SLG 41 SLG 42 SLG 43 SLG 44 Con(I = 90 mA) Max. (I = 180 mA) Max. (I = 250 mA) Max. (I = 80 mA) Max. ductor ductor tance DiaΩ/km1 Cable Length at Cable Length at Cable Length at Cable Length at Cross Sec meter Section in in mm UV=24V UV=30V UV=24V UV=30V UV=24V UV=30V UV=24V UV=30V mm2 1 2 0.07 2 0.3 2 550 120 240 40 100 30 70 90 200 0.2 0.5 185 360 720 120 300 85 210 250 650 0.5 0.8 0.8 2 1.5 2 70 950 1000 310 790 230 570 700 1000 1.0 2 50 1000 1000 440 1000 320 800 1000 1000 1.4 2 24 1000 1000 920 1000 660 1000 1000 1000 The resistance values are average values. They refer to the forward and return conductors. A single wire has half the resistance. Use of these conductor cross sections requires crimp contacts (not included) in the SLG connection plug. Field with gray background: Recommended by Siemens: Standard cable, LiYC11Y, 6 x 0.25, shielded. The cable is available from Siemens under the order number 6GT2 090-0A... Gounding of the SLG cable We recommend always applying the shield of the SLG cable to a grounding rail over a large surface. Cable with drag capability The SLG/SIM can also be connected with a cable that can be dragged. Recommended cable type: HPM Paartronic 3340-C-PUR 3 x 2 x 0.25. The cable can be made by the customer. 3-80 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Supplementary power pack for SLG When a supplementary power pack is installed in the vicinity of the SLG, the maximum cable length (i.e., 1000 m) between ASM and SLG can always be used. ÏÏ Note The 24 V power supply line (i.e., pin 2 in the SLG plug) may not be connected to the ASM. 6-core (with 24 V connection) SLG 24 V = 90 230 V ÏÏ Figure 3-56 1000 m (max.) SLG with supplementary power pack The power pack shown in the drawing is available from Siemens under order number 6GT2 494-0AA00 (see chapter 7.2). The customer must provide the cable from the supplementary power pack to the SLG. Note The power pack can also be used as the main power pack for the ASM 400, ASM 424 or ASM 454. See figure 3-57. Ï SLG Pin assignment on the socket connector 1, 4 2, 3 Ï 24 V = 6GT2 494-0AA00 Figure 3-57 GND +24 Volt 230 V MOBY wide-range power pack on the ASM 400 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-81 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.10.2 Plug Connector Assignment Plug connector assignment of the SLG plug connector1 Table 3-18 Plug connector on the SLG 2 Pin 1 6 3 5 4 Designation 1 – Receiving 2 + 24 Volt 3 Ground (0 V) 4 + Sending 5 – Sending 6 + Receiving Cable sield 1 This plug connector applies to SLG 40, SLG 41, SLG 42, SLG 43 and SLG 44. Table 3-19 Plug connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D plug connector1 Pin 9-pin subminiature D plug connector with screw-type lock 1 Not used 2 + Sending 3 + Receiving 4 Not used 5 - Receiving 6 - Sending 7 Ground (0 V) 8 +24 Volt (see caution note) 9 Not used Geh. 1 Desigantion Cable shield This plug connector assignment applies to: ASM 400, ASM 424, ASM 454, ES 030 => SLG ASM 400, ASM 410 (STG plug connector). Note When making your own cables, remember that the “sending” signal of the SLG must be connected to the “receiving” signal of the ASM,and vice versa. ! 3-82 Caution When using the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG, do not wire the +24 Volt pin to the ASM. Cf. table 3-19. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Installing the SLG plug connector If the SLG plug connector has to be turned in a different direction when using a prefabricated cable, proceed as shown in the drawing below to position the contact support differently. The plug connector on the SLG cannot be turned. Knurled screw for solid connections (no tools needed) Removable housing cover for easy mounting Cage-claw cable retainer Crimp contacts for use even with strong vibration* Secure the contact support in 7 positions. * Crimp snap-on connector available from: Hirschmann D-72606 Nuertingen Tel: 07127/14-1479 Type: XZC0700 Order no: 932 507-001 Figure 3-58 Drawing of mounting the SLG plug connector Ordering data Table 3-20 Ordering data for the SLG plug connector SLG-side, 6-pin plug with socket contacts for crimping with bent output (Contact support must be secured in 7 positions.) S 1 each S 1 package (10 each) 6GT2 090-0BA00 6GT2 090-0BA10 with straight output S 1 each MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6GT2 090-0UA00 3-83 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.10.3 Connection Cables Connection cable for ASM 400/401/ 424/454, ES 030 ↔ SLG 6GT2 091-0A... or 6GT2 091-2A... 9-pin subminiature2 D (pins, screw6 type locking) 6 3 4 5 5 1 3 7 8 SLG plug connector2 (socket) 1 2 Housing 1 When the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG is used, do not wire this pin to the ASM. 2 6GT2 091-0A... With angled SLG plug (standard) 6GT2 091-2A... With straight SLG plug (not shown) Figure 3-59 Connection cable for ASM 450/452/ 473 ↔ SLG 6GT2 091-1CH20 Connection cable: ASM 400/401/424/454, ES 030 ↔ SLG Two 5-pin round M12 plug connectors SLG plug connector (socket) 2m 25 X1/2 X1/3 X1/1 X1/4 18,5 X1 X2 X2/3 X2/1 X1/5 White Brown Green Yellow Gray Pink 6 1 4 5 3 2 X2/5 Figure 3-60 3-84 Connection cable: ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Connection cable for ASM 410 ↔ SLG 6GT2 091-0D... or 6GT2 091-2D... Cable with core sleeves 3 (7) White 4 (8) Brown SLG plug connector2 1 (socket) 5 (9) Green 4 6 (10) Yellow 5 2 Gray 3 11 Pink 2 6 (Shield) 1 When the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG is used, do not wire this pin to the ASM. 2 6GT2 091-0D... With angled SLG plug (standard) 6GT2 091-2D... With straight SLG plug (not shown) Figure 3-61 ! Connection cable: ASM 410 ↔ SLG Caution The cable shield must be secured with a shield clamp directly on the interface module and grounded on a grounding rail. Connection cable for ASM 470/475 ↔ SLG 6GT2 091-0E... or 6GT2 091-2E... Cable with core sleeves 4 (12) 5 (13) 6 (14) 7 (15) 8 (16) 9 (17) White Brown Green Yellow Pink Gray 6 SLG plug connector1 1 (socket) 4 5 2 3 (Shield) Cable shield bared 1 6GT2 091-0E... With angled SLG plug (standard) 6GT2 091-2E... With straight SLG plug (not shown) Figure 3-62 Connection cable: ASM 470/475 ↔ SLG MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-85 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Connection cable RS 232 PC ↔ ASM 424 6GT2 391-0B... ASM side 9-pin, sub D (pins, screw lock) 2 3 5 TxD RxD RxD TxD 0V 0V Housing 2 PC side 9-pin, sub D (socket, screw lock) 3 5 Housing l* (5 m/20 m) * Made by customer, up to 32 m Figure 3-63 3-86 Connection cable RS 232 PC ↔ ASM 424 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.10.4 Cable Lengths Starting on 10.01.2001 the length key is no longer supported for MOBY cables. Cables are now only offered in certain lengths. See table 3-21. The cables are based on the following rules. S Loose cables only in the lengths 50 m, 120 m, and 800 m S Fabricated cables only in the lengths 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m and 50 m Customers may make their own cables in all lengths. See table 3-17. Table 3-21 Ordering data for MOBY cables SLG stub line, fabricated Between ASM 400/401/424/454, ES 030-K and SLG S SLG plug bent Length: 5m 10 m 20 m 50 m 6GT2 091-0AH50 6GT2 091-0AN10 6GT2 091-0AN20 6GT2 091-0AN50 Length: 10 m 50 m 6GT2 091-2AN10 6GT2 091-2AN50 Length: 5m 10 m 20 m 6GT2 091-0DH50 6GT2 091-0DN10 6GT2 091-0DN20 Length: 5m 6GT2 091-2DH50 Length: 2m 5m 10 m 20 m 50 m 6GT2 091-0EH20 6GT2 091-0EH50 6GT2 091-0EN10 6GT2 091-0EN20 6GT2 091-0EN50 Length: 2m 5m 10 m 50 m 6GT2 091-2EH20 6GT2 091-2EH50 6GT2 091-2EN10 6GT2 091-2EN50 S SLG plug straight Between ASM 410 and SLG S SLG plug bent S SLG plug straight Between ASM 470/475 and SLG S SLG plug bent S SLG plug straight MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 3-87 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-21 Ordering data for MOBY cables SLG stub line, fabricated Between ASM 450/452/473 and SLG S SLG plug bent Length: 2 m (standard) 5m 10 m 20 m 50 m 6GT2 091-1CH20 6GT2 091-1CH50 6GT2 091-1CN10 6GT2 091-1CN20 6GT2 091-1CN50 S SLG plug straight Length: 2m 6GT2 091-2CH20 Stub line, 24 V Stub line, 2-core for the 24 V DC power supply of the ASM 400/401. Stub line is equipped with pin cable shoes on both sides. Length: 2m 5m 6GT2 091-0CH20 6GT2 091-0CH50 Length: 5m 20 m 6GT2 391-0BH50 6GT2 391-0BN20 RS 232 stub line Between PC and ASM 424 Cables, without plug connectors SLG cable, without plug connector between ASM and SLG. Type: 6 x 0,25 mm2 Length: 3-88 50 m 120 m 800 m 6GT2 090-0AN50 6GT2 090-0AT12 6GT2 090-0AT80 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 4 4-1 Mobile Data Memories 4.1 Introduction Application area MOBY identification systems ensure that useful data accompany a product from the very beginning. Mobile data memories are attached to the product or its conveyor or packaging unit and are written, changed and read - all without contact. All important information related to production and material flow control is located right on the product. A sturdy housing permits use in rugged environments and makes the MDS resistant to many chemical substances. Layout and functions The primary components of the mobile data memories (i.e., MDS) include logic, antenna, FRAM, and RAM (with battery) or EEPROM. When an MDS moves into the transmission field of the read/write device (i.e., SLG), the power supply unit generates and monitors the necessary power for all switching elements. The pulse-coded information is conditioned for further processing as purely digital signals. In addition to managing the various memories, the monitoring unit takes care of data handling and the test routines. Overview Table 4-1 Overview table of MDS (replacement parts not included in the table) Memory Size MDS Type MDS 401 MDS 402 MDS 403 MDS 404 MDS 506 MDS 507 MDS 514 MDS 439 E 1 8 (7)1 Kbyte FRAM Dimensions (L x W x H in mm) Protection Rating –25 to +85 ° C Ø 30 x 10 IP67 8 (7)1 Kbyte FRAM –25 to +70 ° C 47.5 x 25 x 15 IP68 8 (7)1 Kbyte FRAM –25 to +85 ° C 47.5 x 25 x 15 IP68 8 (7)1 Kbyte FRAM –25 to +85 ° C 50 x 50 x 20 IP68 –25 to +70 ° C 75 x 75 x 40 IP68 –25 to +70 ° C 125 x 75 x 40 IP65 –25 to +85 ° C 50 IP68 Up to +200 ° C (cyclic) Ø: 114 x 83 32 (28)1Kbyte 32 (28)1 32 (28)1 Kbyte 8 (7)1 FRAM Kbyte RAM FRAM Kbyte EEPROM x 50 x 20 IP68 Net capacity during ECC operation Substitute types 4-2 Temperature Range (During Operation) Table 4-1 shows an overview of all current MDS types. See appendix D for a complete table of all old and new MDSs. This table also specifies substitute types for components which are no longer available. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories Operational requirements/ environmental requirements Table 4-2 Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS Proof of mechanical stability is provided by oscillation test with variable frequency in acc. w. part 2-6 of DIN IEC 68 Loading in succession in three vertical axes S S S S S Frequency range 10 to 500 Hz Amplitude 1.5 mm (10 to 58 Hz) Acceleration 20 g (10 to 500 Hz) Test duration per axis 20 frequency cycles Speed of passage 1 octave/min. Proof of mechanical stability via continuous shock stress in acc. w. part 2-29 of DIN IEC 68 S Test conditions 50 g, 6 msec, 500 impacts per axis Protection rating IP65/IP68 in acc. w. DIN EN 60529/ VDE 0470-1 1 Ambient temperature S During operation S During transportation and storage –25° to +70° C (+85° C) Temperature gradient over storage temperature range in acc. w. part 2-4 of DIN IEC 68 Transition from 0° C to 70° C (85° C) in 10 sec; duration 30 min; –40° to +70° C (+85° C) Transition from 70° C (85° C) to 0° C in 15 sec; duration 30 min; 100 cycles Cleaning with water jet 1 Max. of 5 min at max. water pressure of 2 bar Definition of IP65 – Protection against penetration of dust (i.e., dust-proof) – Full protection against touch – Protection against water jet Definition of IP68 – Protection against penetration of dust (i.e., dust-proof) – Full protection against touch – MDS can be continuously submerged in water. Contact manufacturer for requirements. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 4-3 Mobile Data Memories 4.2 MDS 401 Figure 4-1 MDS 401 Ordering data Table 4-3 Ordering data for MDS 401 6GT2 000-0CA10 Mobile data memory MDS 401 with 8-Kbyte FRAM Technical data Table 4-4 Technical data of MDS 401 Memory size 8189-byte FRAM Memory organization Random access MTBF (at 40° C) 1.5 x 106 hours Battery None Read cycles 1010 (at 25° C) Programming cycles 1010 (at 25° C) Data retention time 10 years Read/write intervals See field data. Shock 50 g Vibration 20 g Torsion and bending stress Not permitted Direction dependency No Securing of MDS Screws or glue Protection rating in accordance with DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1 IP67 Housing S Color S Material S Chemical resistance Black Macromelt (MM) – Resistant to Caustic soda, cutting oil, transmission oil, cooler fluid, petroleum – Less resistant to Toluol, aceton, alcohol S Dimensions in mm Approx. Äž 27 x 9 Ambient temperature 4-4 S During operation S During transportation and storage –25° to +85° C Weight Approx. 7 g –40° to +85° C MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories Field data (in mm) Table 4-5 Field data of MDS 401 SLG 40 SLG 40-S SLG 41/ SLG 41C SLG 41-S Operating distance (Sa) 2 to 8 2 to 6 0 to 6 0 to 6 Limit distance (Sg) 10 8 10 10 S L: Vertical S 2L: Horizontal – – 30 20 – – 50 40 Diameter of transmission window d = 18 d=9 – – Minimum distance from MDS to MDS > 50 > 50 > 80 > 80 Transmission window The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS. Dimensions (in mm) Dimensional drawing 27±0,2 9+0,5 22±0,2 7+0,5 MOBY I Antenna side SIEMENS MDS 401 Figure 4-2 Dimensions of MDS 401 Mounting on metal Table 4-6 Decrease in field data with mounting of the MDS 401 on or in metal Mouting position Metal Metal MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 SLG 40 SLG 40-S SLG 41 100 % 95 % 60 % 70 % 75 % Not permitted 4-5 Mobile Data Memories Mounting methods Mounting of the MDS 401 from behind 22,4 Spacer Length 8 mm 2 22,4 Adhesive Mounting plate Screws; Tightening provided by the torque ≤ 0.8 Nm customer Mounting of the MDS 401 from the front in pocket hole 27,4 27,5 Adhesive 7,6 9,7 22,4 Mounting ring or washer (provided by the customer) MOBY I SIEMENS MDS 401 7,6 Mounting of the MDS 401 from the front with cover (non-metallic) 5 ∅27,5 3,5 1,5 ∅32,2 Recess for M4 screw 40 4,2 55 45 Material: Plastic, fiber glass reinforced (torsionally rigid plastic, e.g. ASI glass-fiber reinforced) O-ring for sealing: O-ring NBR ∅ 2 mm Outer diameter 32 mm Inner diameter 28 mm Shore hardness 70 Figure 4-3 Ways to mount the MDS 401 4-6 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories Definition of the field midpoints Midpoint of MDS 401 transmission window MOBY I SIEMENS MDS 401 5 Distance of field midpoints to edge of SLG head 5 SLG 41 Midpoint of SLG transmission window Midpoint of MDS 401 transmission window Distance of field midpoints to edge of SLG head SLG 41-S 5 MOBY I SIEMENS MDS 401 5 Midpoint of SLG transmission window Midpoint of MDS 401 transmission window Distance of field midpoints to edge of SLG head 12 SLG 41C MOBY I SIEMENS MDS 401 12 Midpoint of SLG transmission window Midpoint of MDS 401 transmission window MOBY I SIEMENS MDS 401 MOBY I View of top of antenna head SLG 40 SLG 40 Midpoint of SLG transmission window Figure 4-4 Field midpoints of MDS 401 Note The midpoint of the MDS 401 transmission window must be positioned exactly over an SLG field midpoint. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 4-7 Mobile Data Memories 4.3 MDS 402 Figure 4-5 MDS 402 Ordering data Table 4-7 Ordering data for MDS 402 Mobile data memory MDS 402 with 8-Kbyte FRAM Technical data Table 4-8 6GT2 000-0CA20 Technical data of MDS 402 Memory size 8189-byte FRAM Memory organization Random access MTBF (at 40° C) 1.5 x 106 hours Read cycles 1010 Programming cycles 1010 Read/write intervals See field data. Shock 50 g Vibration 20 g Direction dependency No Securing of MDS 2 M3 screws Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 0.7 Nm Protection rating S In acc. w. DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1 IP 68/IP X9K (steam jet: 150 mm; 10 - 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75° C) Housing S Color S Material S Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm Gray Polyamide 12 47.5 x 25 x 15 Ambient temperature 4-8 S During operation S During transportation and storage –25° to +70° C Weight 25 g –40° to +70° C MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories Field data (in mm) Table 4-9 Field data of MDS 402 SLG 40 SLG 40-S SLG 41/ SLG 41-S SLG 41 C Operating distance (Sa) 2 to 8 2 to 6 0 to 6 0 to 6 Limit distance (Sg) 10 8 10 10 S L: Vertical S 2L: Horizontal – – 30 20 – – 50 40 Diameter of transmission window d = 18 d=9 – – Minimum distance from MDS to MDS > 50 > 50 > 80 > 80 Transmission window Dimensions (in mm) Dimensional drawing 25 MOBY I SIEMENS MDS 402 17,5 1) 12,5 47,5 3,5 13,5 1) 40 4 15 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Metal-free space a MDS 402 a a = 10 mm Metal-free space with flush installation No distance to metal required on this side a It is possible to mount the MDS directly on metal. This may result in reductions of the range of up to 20%. 1 Perpendicular intervals of the mounting holes Figure 4-6 Dimensions of MDS 402 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 4-9 Mobile Data Memories Definition of the field midpoints Midpoint of MDS 402 transmission window MDS 402 Distance of field midpoins to edge of SLG head 5 5 SLG 41 Midpoint of SLG transmission window Midpoint of MDS 402 transmission window Distance of field midpoints to edge of SLG head SLG 41-S 5 MDS 402 5 Midpoint of SLG transmission window Midpoint of MDS 402 transmission window Distance of field midpoints to edge of SLG head 12 SLG 41C MDS 402 12 Midpoint of SLG transmission window Midpoint of MDS 402 transmission window MDS 402 MOBY I View of top of antenna head SLG 40 SLG 40 Midpoint of SLG transmission window Figure 4-7 Field midpoints of MDS 402 Note The midpoint of the MDS 402 transmission window must be positioned exactly over an SLG field midpoint. 4-10 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories 4.4 MDS 403 Figure 4-8 MDS 403 Ordering data Table 4-10 Ordering data for MDS 403 Mobile data memory MDS 403 with 8-Kbyte FRAM Technical data Table 4-11 6GT2 000-1CF00 Technical data of MDS 403 Memory size 8189-byte FRAM Memory organization Random access MTBF (without battery; at 40° C) 1.5 x 106 hours Battery No battery Read cycles 1010 (at 25° C) Programming cycles 1010 (at 25° C) Data retention time 10 years Read/write intervals See field data. Shock 50 g Vibration 20 g Direction dependency Yes S Max. angle deviation " 45 ° Securing of MDS 2 M3 screws Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 0.7 Nm Protection rating S In acc. w. DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1 IP 68/IP X9K (steam jet: 150 mm; 10 - 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75° C) Housing S Color S Material S Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Gray Polyamide 12 47.5 x 25 x 15 4-11 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-11 Technical data of MDS 403 Ambient temperature Field data (in mm) S During operation S During transportation and storage –25° to +85° C Weight 25 g Table 4-12 –40° to +85° C Field data of MDS 403 SLG 41/ SLG 41-S/ SLG 41C SLG 42 SIM 4x Operating distance (Sa) 4 to 15 10 to 30 0 to 25 Limit distance (Sg) 30 80 40 Transmission window (L x W) 65 x 25 110 x 50 80 x 45 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS > 120 > 200 > 200 The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS. 4-12 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories Dimensions (in mm) Dimensional drawing 25 1) MOBY I SIEMENS MDS 403 17.5 47.5 3.5 The arrow shows the direction of movement and the orientation of the MDS to the SLG. 40 1) 4 15 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ 1 Right-angle distance between the mounting holes Metal-free space (see chap. 3.5.1) a MDS 403 a a a Figure 4-9 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ a w10 mm Metal-free space with flush installation With flush installation in metal the transmission window is reduced by up to 40% (with a = 10 mm). However, the working distance in table 4-12 can still be used. The MDS 403 can be mounted directly on metal without noticeable reduction of the field data. Dimensions of MDS 403 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 4-13 Mobile Data Memories The transmission window The transmission window is the basis for the configuration of communication in dynamic mode. Use the formula in chap. 3.1 to calculate the max. amount of data which can be processed in dynamic operation. MOBY I MDS403 L x W = 65 x 25 [mm] Direction of movement of the MDS L x W = 65 x 25 [mm] MOBY I MDS403 MDS 403 and SLG 41 MDS 403 and SLG 41C Direction of movement of the MDS L x W = 65 x 25 [mm] MOBY I MDS403 MDS 403 and SLG 41-S MOBY I MDS403 MOBY I MDS403 Direction of movement of the MDS Length (L) Direction of movement of the MDS L x W = 110 x 50 [mm] L x W = 80 x 45 [mm] Width (W) MDS 403 and SLG 42 Figure 4-10 4-14 MDS 403 and SIM Transmission window of the MDS 403 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories Transmission window with auxiliary lobes Figure 4-11 shows the complete transmission window of the MDS 403 with the auxiliary lobes. Although auxiliary lobes are always present, they should only be used in exceptional cases since their read distances are very limited. ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ Transmission hole Figure 4-11 ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇ Main window Auxiliary lobes Transmission window of the MDS 403 with auxiliary lobes Exact information on the field geometry of the auxiliary lobes is not available since the values vary widely depending on the particular working distance and application. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 4-15 Mobile Data Memories 4.5 MDS 404 Figure 4-12 Ordering data Table 4-13 MDS 404 Ordering data for MDS 404 Mobile data memory MDS 404 with 8-Kbyte FRAM including mounting frame 6GT2 000-0EG00 Replacement parts: Mounting frame Technical data Table 4-14 6GT2 090-0CA10 Technical data of MDS 404 Memory size 8189-byte FRAM Memory organization Random access MTBF (without battery; at 40° C) 1.5 x 106 hours Battery None Read cycles 1010 Programming cycles 1010 Read/write intervals See field data. Shock 50 g Vibration 20 g Direction dependency No Securing of MDS 2 M4 screws Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 1.2 Nm Protection rating S In acc. w. DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1 IP 68/IP X9K (steam jet: 150 mm; 10 - 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75° C) Housing S Color S Material S Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 4-16 Gray Polyamide 12 50 x 50 x 20 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-14 Technical data of MDS 404 Ambient temperature Field data (in mm) S During operation S During transportation and storage –25° to +85° C Weight 50 g Table 4-15 –40° to +85° C Field data of MDS 404 SLG 41/ SLG41-S SLG 41C SLG 42 SLG 43 SIM 41/42/43 Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 12 0 to 12 0 to 30 0 to 50 0 to 20 Limit distance (Sg) 25 25 60 90 33 S L: Vertical S 2L: Horizontal 36 30 90 140 60 72 60 180 260 80 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS > 90 > 90 > 250 > 500 > 200 Transmission window The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS. Dimensions (in mm) MDS Mounting frame 50 46 50 40 9 +1 19 ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ Metal-free space 16 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 Mounting diagram a a a a a = 10 mm Metal-free space with flush installation Figure 4-13 MDS can be mounted as shown with the mounting frame. Dimensions of MDS 404 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 4-17 Mobile Data Memories 4.6 MDS 506 Figure 4-14 Ordering data Table 4-16 MDS 506 Ordering data for MDS 506 Mobile data memory MDS 506 with 32-Kbyte RAM Technical data Table 4-17 6GT2 000-0DC00-0AA0 Technical data of MDS 506 Memory size 32765-byte FRAM Memory organization Random access MTBF (at 40° C) 1.5 x 106 hours Battery No battery (starting with E of MDS) Read cycles 1010 Programming cycles 1010 Read/write intervals See field data. Shock 50 g Vibration 20 g Direction dependency No Securing of MDS 2 M5 screws Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 2 Nm Protection rating in acc. w. DIN EN 60529/ VDE 0470-1 IP68 Housing S Color S Material S Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm Gray Polyamide 12 75 x 75 x 40 Ambient temperature 4-18 S During operation S During transportation and storage –25° to +70° C Weight 200 g –40° to +70° C MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories Field data (in mm) Table 4-18 Field data of MDS 506 SLG 42 SLG 43 SIM 41/42/43 Operating distance (Sa) 101 to 35 201 to 100 0 to 25 Limit distance (Sg) 70 150 40 S L: Vertical S 2L: Horizontal 120 220 85 190 400 100 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS > 300 > 600 > 300 Transmission window 1 Underranging the minimum operating distance can cause a transmission gap in the middle of the field. No communication with the MDS can take place in this transmission gap. The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS. ∅5 75 Dimensional drawing 65 Dimensions (in mm) 2.5 65 3.5 75 40 ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ Metal-free space h w 20 mm a a a a a = 40 mm Metal-free space with flush installation Figure 4-15 Metal Non-metallic spacer MDS can be mounted directly on metal although this may reduce its range by up to 50%. This reduced range can be avoided by maintaining a distance of h ≥ 20 mm to the metal. Dimensions of MDS 506 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 4-19 Mobile Data Memories 4.7 MDS 507 1 Description The MDS 507 data memories were designed for read and write-accesses from great distances. They are equipped with a battery block containing 2 batteries (i.e., the RAM battery and the dialog battery). The RAM battery is used to buffer the RAM data and to turn on the MDS as soon as it enters the transmission window of an active SLG. The dialog battery is used to power the control logic of the MDS. Both batteries are contained in a battery block. This battery block can be replaced via plug-in contacts. The dialog battery is only activated when the MDS is located in the transmission window of an SLG. Outside the transmission window, the dialog battery is in standby mode, and virtually no discharging takes place. When using the MDS 507, make sure that the SLG (presence) is switched off after the MDS is processed or the MDS leaves the transmission window. This will ensure long dialog battery life. The MDS 507 can also be used with an SLG 42 or SLG 43 although its range is reduced. It can also be used with the STG 4F. Even with a dead dialog battery, the MDS 507 can still be processed with an SLG 42/43 or an STG I. This provides the user with information on the status of the dialog or backup battery. Physical layout The MDS 507 consists of a floor plate and the upper housing portion. The upper housing portion contains the electronics and the batteries. Changing the batteries is very simple with the plug-in contacts. Floor plate and upper housing portion are held together with a snap-in catch. The upper housing portion can be removed by opening the four catches. The floor plate on the MDS carrier may remain in place (i.e., screwed in) while the batteries are being changed. Figure 4-16 1 MDS 507 Only available now as a spare part 4-20 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories Ordering data Table 4-19 Ordering data for MDS 507 Mobile data memory MDS 507 with 32-Kbyte RAM Configuring manual SLG 44/MDS 507 German English Accessories (order separately) Magnet holder for MDS 5071 Replacement battery1 1 Technical data 6GT2 000-0DC01-0AA0 On “Software MOBY” CD 6GT2 090-0PA00 6GT2 094-0AA0 Only available now as a spare part Table 4-20 Technical data of MDS 507 MDS 507 Memory size 32 Kbytes Memory type RAM Memory organization Random access MTBF (without battery; at 40° C) 1.5 x 106 hours Battery life span S At 25° C (continuous temperature) S At 70° C (continuous temperature) Approx. 10 years Approx. 6 years Life span of dialog battery S 15-min processing time/day S 5-min processing time/day S < 1 min processing time/day Approx. 2 years Battery for data backup Yes Battery for dialog with SLG Yes Read cycles Unlimited Programming cycles at 70° C (min.) Unlimited Programming cycles at 40° C (typical) Unlimited Read/write intervals See field data. Shock 50 g Vibration 20 g Direction dependency Yes Maximum angle deviation "45° Securing of MDS 4 M5 screws Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 2 Nm Protection rating IP65 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Approx. 5 years Approx. 10 years 4-21 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-20 Technical data of MDS 507 MDS 507 Housing S Color S Material S Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm Gray Polyamide 12 125 x 75 x 40 Ambient temperature S During operation S During transportation and storage –25° to +70° C Weight 330 g 1 Field data (in mm) –40° to +70° C Discontinued Table 4-21 Field data of MDS 507 SLG 44 Operating distance (Sa) 100 to 800 Limit distance (Sg) > 1000 Transmission window S L (at Sa) S W (at Sa) 1200 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS > 4000 300 Note Using the field data specified here, the MDS 507 can be configured without any special knowledge. However, more complex configurations require the exact transmission window as described in chapter 3.6. 4-22 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories Dimensions (in mm) Dimensional drawing 5.5 125 115 40 65 75 ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ Metal-free space a a a a Magnet holder a > 40 mm Metal-free space with flush installation Mounting on a nonmetallic spacer can be omitted. M5 threaded socket 128 78 15 Figure 4-17 Material: Polyamide Foam rubber pad (2.5 mm) Dimensions of MDS 507 Mounting screws and washer for the MDS are not included. The magnet holder can be used in all situations in which the MDS must be removed very quickly from one object and affixed to another. Using the foam rubber pad, the MDS magnet holder can be placed directly on painted iron surfaces. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 4-23 Mobile Data Memories 4.8 MDS 514 Figure 4-18 Ordering data Table 4-22 MDS 514 Ordering data for MDS 514 Mobile data memory MDS 514 with 32-Kbyte FRAM including mounting frame 6GT2 000-0DG10 Replacement parts: Mounting frame Technical data Table 4-23 6GT2 090-0CA10 Technical data of MDS 514 Memory size 32765-byte FRAM Memory organization Random access MTBF (without battery; at 40° C) 1.5 x 106 hours Battery No, starting with D of MDS Read cycles 1010 Programming cycles 1010 Read/write intervals See field data. Shock 50 g Vibration 20 g Direction dependency No Securing of MDS 2 M4 screws Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 1.2 Nm Protection rating S In acc. w. DIN EN 60529/VDE 0470-1 IP 68/IP X9K (steam jet: 150 mm; 10 - 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75° C) Housing S Color S Material S Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 4-24 Gray Polyamide 12 50 x 50 x 20 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-23 Technical data of MDS 514 Ambient temperature Field data (in mm) S During operation S During transportation and storage –25° to +85° C Weight 50 g Table 4-24 –40° to +85° C Field data of MDS 514 SLG 41/ SLG 41C SLG 41-S SLG 42 SLG 43 SIM 41/42/43 Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 12 0 to 12 0 to 30 0 to 50 0 to 20 Limit distance (Sg) 25 25 60 90 33 36 30 90 140 60 72 60 180 260 80 >90 > 250 > 500 > 200 Transmission window S L: Vertical S 2L: Horizontal Minimum distance > 90 from MDS to MDS The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS. Dimensions (in mm) MDS Mounting frame 50 46 50 40 9 19+1 ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ Metal-free space 16 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 Mounting diagram a a a a a = 10 mm Metal-free space with flush installation Figure 4-19 MDS can be mounted as shown with the mounting frame. Dimensions of MDS 514 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 4-25 Mobile Data Memories 4.9 MDS 439 E Application area This heat-proof data memory can be used when processes expose the data memory to temperatures in excess of 85° C but less than 220° C. Its IP68 protection rating ensures reliable service under rugged operating conditions. The MDS is dimensioned so that it can be secured both on a skid and directly on a chassis. Some typical applications are listed below. S Priming, KTL area and cataphoretic dip coating with the related drying chambers S Surface painting and related drying chambers S Washing at temperatures > 85° C S Other applications with higher temperatures Figure 4-20 Ordering data Table 4-25 MDS 439 E Ordering data for MDS 439 E 6GT2 000-0CD30-0AD0 Mobile data memory MDS 439 E with 8-Kbyte FRAM Technical data 4-26 Order separately: Holder Short version Covering hood 6GT2 090-0QA00 6GT2 090-0QB00 Description - MDS 439 E German English 6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA1 6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA2 Table 4-26 Technical data of MDS 439 E Memory size 8189-byte FRAM Memory organization Random access MTBF (at 40° C) 2.5 x 106 hours Battery No MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-26 Technical data of MDS 439 E Read cycles in acc. w. DIN EN 60529/ VDE 0470-1 Unlimited Write cycles S At 70° C (min.) S At 40° C (typ.) 10000 Read/write intervals See field data. Shock1 50 g Vibration1 5g Direction dependency No Hazardous area approval No Protection rating in acc. w. DIN EN 60529/ VDE 0470-1 IP68 109 Housing S Color S Material S Dimensions (∅ x H) in mm Brown Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) 114 x 83 Ambient temperature S Permanent operation S Cyclic operation S Transportation and storage –25° to +100° C Weight 900 g Silicone free Yes (all materials) 1 Field data (in mm) –25° to +220° C –40° to +110° C Applies only when used with original holder Table 4-27 Field data of MDS 439 E SLG 42 SLG 43 SIM 41/42/43 Operating distance (Sa) 101 to 55 201 to 80 0 to 25 Limit distance (Sg) 70 125 33 S L: Vertical S 2L: Horizontal 120 190 75 210 330 100 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS > 500 > 600 > 300 Transmission window 1 Underranging the minimum operating distance can cause a transmission gap in the middle of the field. No communication with the MDS can take place in this transmission gap. The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 4-27 Mobile Data Memories Dimensions (in mm) 11 + 1 Mounting edge 61 + 1 83 + 3 11+ 1 114 ± 0,5 7 Antenna side Figure 4-21 Dimensional drawing of MDS 439 E Short version (6GT2 090-0QA00) 234 140 100 11 96 25 Material: stainless sheet steel (chrome-nickel steel) with thickness of 2.5 mm Figure 4-22 Holder of the MDS 439 E data memory Covering hood, optional (6GT2 090-0QB00) 27 51.5 Antenna side of the MDS Figure 4-23 4-28 Assembly of MDS 439 E with holder MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Mobile Data Memories The holder includes all mounting materials and a drawing. Mounting screws (diameter of M10 and minimum length of 25 mm) to secure the holder are not included. The mounting screws have a diameter of M10. The minimum length is 25 mm. The optional covering hood can be used for the long and short version of the holder. ! Caution We strongly recommend only using the MDS with its original holder. Only this holder can ensure that the MDS adheres to the values specified for shock, vibration and temperature. A protective cover is recommended for use in painting applications. ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ a a = 40 mm S The MDS holder has no effect on the metal-free space. S The optional protective cover has no effect on the metal-free space. Sectional drawing No special metal-free space is required on the upper half of the MDS (i.e., above the holder). a Figure 4-24 Metal-free space for MDS 439 E MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 4-29 Mobile Data Memories Cyclic MDS operation at temperatures > 110° C At ambient temperatures > 110° C, it must be ensured that the interior temperature of the MDS does not exceed the critical threshold of 110° C. Each heat-up phase must be followed by a cool-down phase. Some limit cycles are listed in the following table. Table 4-28 Limit cycles of MDS 439 E Tu (Heat-Up) Heating Up Tu (Cool-Down) Cooling Down 220° C 0,5 h 25° C >2h 200° C 1h 25° C >2h 190° C 1h 25° C > 1 h 45 min 180° C 2h 25° C >5h 170° C 2h 25° C >4h Calculation of a temperature profile is available from Siemens on request. Note For further configuration notes, see chapter 3.7 or the description of MDS 439 E (6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA2). 4-30 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5 5-1 Read/Write Devices 5.1 Introduction Application area The read/write devices (i.e., SLGs) provide inductive communication with the mobile data memories (i.e., MDSs) and the serial link to the interfaces (i.e., ASMs). Various SLG models – for short, medium and long distances to the MDS – are available to meet customer requirements. Layout and functions The SLG executes commands received from the interface. These commands for reading and writing data are converted via a modulator/demodulator circuit. Communication between MDS and SLG takes place via inductive alternating fields. The amount of data which can be transferred between SLG and MDS depends on the factors listed below. S The speed at which the MDS moves through the transmission window of the SLG S The length of the transmission window S The type of MDS (i.e., RAM, FRAM, EEPROM) Overview table Table 5-1 Overview table of the SLG Operating Distance Sa (Depending on MDS) Limit Distance Sg SLG 40 2 to 8 mm 10 mm –25 to +70° C ∅ 30 x 54 (head) IP65 SLG 40-S 2 to 6 mm 8 mm –25 to +70° C ∅ 18 x 30 (head) IP65 SLG 41/41-S 0 to 15 mm 25 mm –25 to +70° C 120 x 40 x 40 IP65 SLG 41C/41CC 0 to 15 mm 25 mm –25 to +70° C 55 x 75 x 30 IP67 SLG 42 0 to 55 mm 70 mm –25 to +70° C 75 x 40 x 75 IP65 SLG 43 0 to 100 mm 150 mm –25 to +70° C 238 x 40 x 80 IP65 SLG 44 100 to 800 mm 1000 mm –25 to +70° C 238 x 40 x 80 IP63 SLG Type 5-2 Temperature Range (During Operation) Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm Protection Rating MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices 5.2 SLG 40 Application area The SLG 40 is extremely suited for use on small assembly lines. The short installation distance between several SLG 40 antennas is a special feature. With the 2 included screw nuts, the antenna head can be positioned with extreme precision for each application. Figure 5-1 Read/write device SLG 40 Ordering data Table 5-2 Ordering data for SLG 40 Read/write device SLG 40 up to 10 mm (low power), incl. screw nuts Accessories: SLG plug connector and stub lines Mounting clamp Technical data Table 5-3 6GT2 001-0EA10 See chapter 3.10 3SX6 284 Technical data of SLG 40 Inductive interface to MDS Data transmission speed Read/write distance SLG to MDS (max.) Transmission frequency S Power S Data Serial interface to ASM Transmission speed Line length, ASM to SLG (max.) at 24 V DC 19200 baud 10 mm (see field data table) 134 kHz 1.81 MHz 6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w. DIN 43651 19200 baud, RS 422 360 m Supply voltage (via serial interface) Nominal value Permissible range Current consumption Idle/operation 24 V DC 20 to 30 V DC MTBF 2 x 106 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 25 mA/90 mA 5-3 Read/Write Devices Table 5-3 Technical data of SLG 40 Housing Dimensions (in mm) For antenna head (∅ x threading x L) For electronics w/o plug (WxHxD) Color Antenna SLG housing Material Antenna SLG housing Plug connection M30 x 1.5 x 54 125 x 40 x 75 Anthracite with orange head Ergo-gray “Crastin” Polyamide 12 DIN 43651 Protection rating Antenna and SLG housing Shock Vibration IP65 50 g 20 g Mounting of SLG Tightening torque (at room temperature) 4 M5 screws v 2 Nm Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage –25° to +70° C –40° to +85° C Weight (approx.) Certifications Field data Applicable for MDS 402/401 Table 5-4 FCC information 215 g EN 300 330 FCC Part 15 UL/CSA Field data of SLG 40 Operating distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 2 to 8 mm 10 mm Median deviation (Ld) Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) 18 mm (+ 9 mm from middle) Da w 50 mm Db w 80 mm Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 40 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 5-4 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices Transmission window Ld Ld sg Field at Sa = 2 mm sa Field at Sa = 8 mm View of top View of side Figure 5-2 View of the antenna Transmission window: To ensure reliable data communication, the antenna of the MDS must be positioned within this field. A diameter of Ld = 18 mm can be configured for the operating distance (2 to 8 mm). ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ Metal-free space a MOBY I SLG 40 ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ a a = 10 mm b = 10 mm Metal-free space with flush installation b ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ Note: The limit and operating distances are reduced when the metal-free space is not adhered to. Figure 5-3 Metal-free space for SLG 40 Optional mounting clamp 30 18 29 36 58 42,5 30 19,5 Figure 5-4 Mounting diagram and dimensions of SLG 40 with mounting clamp MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-5 Read/Write Devices Definition of distance D Da Db Da w 50 mm Db w 80 mm The SLG electronics can be mounted directly next to each other. Figure 5-5 Distance D for SLG 40 Dimensions (in mm) Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions Minimum bending radius: 20 mm 40 5.5 Cable length 0.5 m Antenna head MOBY I Screw nuts 54 M30 115 125 Antenna side SLG 40 Top view of antenna head 21 MOBY I 65 75 Figure 5-6 5-6 36 SLG 40 Dimensional diagram of SLG 40 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices 5.3 SLG 40-S Application area The SLG 40 is extremely suited to use in small assembly lines. The short installation distance between several SLG 40-S antennas is a special feature. With the 2 included screw nuts, the antenna head can be positioned with extreme precision for each application. Figure 5-7 Ordering data Technical data Table 5-5 Read/write device SLG 40-S Ordering data for SLG 40-S Read/write device SLG 40-S up to 8 mm (low power), incl. screw nuts 6GT2 001-0EB00 SLG plug connector and stub lines See chapter 3.10 Table 5-6 Technical data of SLG 40-S Housing Dimensions (in mm) For antenna head (∅ x threading x L) M18 x 1.0 x 30 For electronics w/o plug (L xW x H) 75 x 75 x 40 Color Antenna Anthracite with orange head SLG housing Ergo-gray Antenna “Crastin” SLG housing Polyamide 12 Material Plug connection DIN 43651 Protection rating Antenna and SLG housing IP65 Shock 50 g Vibration 20 g Storage temperature –40° to +85° C Operation temperature –25° to +70° C MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-7 Read/Write Devices Table 5-6 Technical data of SLG 40-S Operating voltage Current consumption Field data 17 to 30 V DC Idle 25 mA Operation 90 mA Serial interface Transmission speed Max. cable length (cf. chap. 3.10.1; standard cable) RS 422 19200 baud 360 m MTBF Transmission frequency 2 x 106 S Power S Data 134 kHz Mounting of SLG 4 M5 screws Tightening torque (at room temperature) Mounting of SLG head (included) v 2 Nm 2 nuts (M18 x 1.0) Weight (approx.) Certifications 200 g EN 300 330 FCC Part 15 UL/CSA 1.81 MHz Applicable for MDS 401/402 Table 5-7 Field data of SLG 40-S Operating distance (Sa) 2 to 6 mm Limit distance (Sg) Diameter of transmission window (Ld) Median deviation Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) 8 mm 9 mm " 4.5 mm from middle Da w 50 mm Db w 80 mm FCC information Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 40S THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 5-8 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices Transmission window Ld Ld sg Field at Sa = 2 mm sa Field at Sa = 8 mm View of top View of side Figure 5-8 View of the antenna Transmission window: To ensure reliable data communication, the antenna of the MDS must be positioned within this field. Metal-free space ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏ a MOBY I SLG 40-S ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ a a = 10 mm b = 10 mm b Metal-free space with flush installation ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Note: The limit and operating distances are reduced when the metal-free space is not adhered to. Figure 5-9 Metal-free space for SLG 40-S Definition of distance D Da Db Da w 50 mm Db w 80 mm The SLG electronics can be mounted directly next to each other. Figure 5-10 Distance D for SLG 40-S MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-9 Read/Write Devices Dimensions (in mm) Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions 50 Minimum bending radius: 20 mm Cable length 0.5 m Antenna head 75 Screw nuts 65 30 25 5 M18 Fine threading Pitch 1.0 5 18 5.5 75 MOBY I SLG 40-S Antenna side 24 Top view of antenna head Figure 5-11 5-10 Dimensional diagram of SLG 40-S MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices 5.4 SLG 41/SLG 41-S Application area The SLG 41 is a low-end read/write device. It is particularly suitable for use when the MDS conveyor system (e.g., pallets) can be physically positioned relatively precisely. The swivel head of the SLG 41 makes it very adaptable to the transportation system. In dynamic operation, only a small amount of data can be read or written between SLG 41 and MDS. In contrast to the SLG 41, the antenna of the SLG 41-S is rotated by 90° in the swivel head so that all positions of the transmission window can be implemented. Ordering data Technical data Figure 5-12 SLG 41/SLG 41-S Table 5-8 Ordering data for SLG 41/SLG 41-S Read/write device up to 25 mm SLG 41 SLG 41-S (antenna turned 90°) 6GT2 001-0AA00 6GT2 001-0AA00-0AX0 SLG plug connector and stub lines See chapter 3.10 Table 5-9 Technical data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S Inductive interface to MDS Data transmission speed 19200 baud Read/write distance SLG to MDS (max.) 30 mm (see field data table) Transmission frequency S Power S Data 134 kHz Serial interface to ASM 6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w. DIN 43651 Transmission speed 19200 baud, RS 422 Line length, ASM to SLG (max.) at 24 V DC 360 m MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 1.81 MHz 5-11 Read/Write Devices Table 5-9 Technical data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S Supply voltage (via serial interface) Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Idle/operation 20 mA / 90 mA MTBF 2 x 106 Housing Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 120 x 40 x 40 Color Anthracite/ergo-gray Material Crastin Plug connection DIN 43651 Protection rating IP65 Shock 50 g Vibration 20 g Mounting of SLG 4 M5 screws Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 3 Nm Ambient temperature Field data During operation –25° to +70° C During transportation and storage –40° to +85° C Weight (approx.) 210 g The exact field data are dependent on the type of MDS used. Table 5-10 FCC information Field data of SLG 41/SLG 41-S Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 15 mm Limit distance (Sg) 30 mm Median deviation (L) Depends on MDS Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) > 200 mm Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 41 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 5-12 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices Transmission window Transmission window at operating distance ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ M SLG 41-S M M Transmission window at operating distance Length of transmission window (L) Figure 5-13 Metal-free space SIEMENS Length of transmission window (L) SIEMENS M Transmission window of SLG 41/SLG 41-S ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ a SIEMENS SIEMENS a a a a a a a a SIEMENS SIEMENS a Figure 5-14 a a a = 25 mm Metal-free space with flush installation a = 25 mm Metal-free space with flush installation Metal-free space for SLG 41/SLG 41-S Definition of distance D SLG 41 / SLG 41-S D SLG 41 D SLG 41 Figure 5-15 Distance D for SLG 41/SLG 41-S MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-13 Read/Write Devices Dimensions (in mm) SLG 41: 40 28 40 80 SIEMENS 40 25 60 5.3 49 14.5 40 Position of swivel head on delivery 30 SLG 41-S: 40 28 40 80 SIEMENS 5.3 40 Figure 5-16 Possible read head changes with the swivel head 25 49 14.5 60 40 Position of swivel head on delivery 30 Dimensional diagram of SLG 41/SLG 41-S SIEMENS SLG 41 SIEMENS SLG 41-S SIEMENS SIEMENS Figure 5-17 5-14 Read head changes of SLG 41/SLG 41-S MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices 5.5 SLG 41C/SLG 41CC Application area The SLG 41C is a low-end read/write device. It is small and compact and is excellent for use in small assembly lines. The high protection rating and use of high-quality materials ensure that the SLG 41C can easily handle even most rugged industrial conditions. It is connected with a 3-m cable which is equipped with core sleeves at the end. This connection line can be extended with terminals or a user-provided connection plug. This connection plug of the ASM is used for the connection to the ASM. The cable length of the SLG 41CC is 2 m. The end of the cable is equipped with a twin M-12 plug. This can be used to connect the SLG 41CC directly to an ASM 450/452/473. Figure 5-18 Ordering data Table 5-11 SLG 41C/41CC read/write device Ordering data of SLG 41C/41CC Read/write device SLG 41C 6GT2 001-0AC00 SLG 41CC read/write device with twin M-12 plug 6GT2 001-0AC00-0AX0 Accessories: Extension cable (not fabricated) Connection plug for ASM 450/473 Technical data Table 5-12 6GT2 090-0A... 6GT2 090-0BC00 Technical data of SLG 41C/41CC Inductive interface to MDS Read/write distance, SLG-MDS, max. Transmission frequency Power Data Serial interface to evaluation unit Data transmission rate Line length, ASM-SLG max. (for 24V DC) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 30 mm (see field data) 134 kHz 1.81MHz RS 422 19 200 Baud 360 m 5-15 Read/Write Devices Table 5-12 Technical data of SLG 41C/41CC Serial interface to user SLG 41C 3 m connection line; open end 2 m connection line; twin M-12 plug for ASM 450/452/473 SLG 41CC Voltage Nominal value Permissible range Current consumption at room temerature Standby Operation Housing Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm Color Material Connection 5-16 24 V DC 20 V to 30 V DC 30 mA 70 mA (typical) 55 x 75 x 30 Gray Plastic (polyamide 12) 3 m connection line, cable ends with core sleeves and labels Protection rating an acc. w. EN 60 529 Shock Vibration IP67 50 g 20 g Mounting of SLG Tightening torque (at room temperature) 4 M 5 screws < 2 Nm Ambient temperature During operation During transpostation and storage –25° C to +70° C –40° C to +85° C Weight approx. 210 g MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices Field data (in mm) Table 5-13 Field data of SLG 41C/41CC MDS 401/402 FCC Information MDS 403 MDS 404/514 Working distance (Sa) 0 to 6 4 to 15 0 to 12 Limit distance (Sg) 10 30 25 Transmission window S L: Vertical S 2L: Horizontal 20 40 65 – 30 60 Width of transmission window (W) 8 25 12 Minimum distance from SLG to SLG w200 w200 w200 Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 41C/41CC THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment. Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-17 Read/Write Devices Transmission window 12 M Transmission window at working distance M 12 20 Length of the transmission window (L) for MDS 401/402 M 5 5 M 30 Length of the transmission window for (L) MDS 404/514 L = 65 Length of the transmission window SIEMENS Transmission window at working distance B = 25 Width of the transmission window M Lenght of the transmisison window for MDS 403 Figure 5-19 5-18 The transmission window is marked on the housing The MDS moves along the “SIEMENS” label on the housing. Transmission window of SLG 41C/41CC MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices Metal-free space a SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 41C a a a a = 15 mm Metal-free area with flush installation Figure 5-20 Metal-free area of SLG 41C/41CC Definition of distance D SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 41C Minimum distance from SLG to SLG D = ≥ 200 mm D D SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 41C Figure 5-21 SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 41C Distance D: SLG 41C/41CC MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-19 Read/Write Devices Dimensions (in mm) 4 3 30 55 75 Core color Designation 65 Brown – Receiving Pink + 24 V SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 41C 45 55 5 5 Gray Ground (0V) Green + Sending Yellow – Sending White + Receiving Black Cable shield w30 ∅5 Core and sleeves Flexible cable anti-kink guard 0,1 m 3m 75 65 SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 41CC 45 55 5 5 ∅5 w30 2m Figure 5-22 5-20 Dimensions of SLG 41C/41CC MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices 5.6 SLG 42 Application area The SLG 42 is a middle-of-the-line read/write device. With its larger antenna, the SLG 42 generates a much larger field than the SLG 41, and a greater range can be achieved with the same data memories. In dynamic operation, larger amounts of data can be read from and written to the MDS. See chapter 3.4. Figure 5-23 Ordering data Technical data SLG 42 read/write device Table 5-14 Ordering data for SLG 42 Read/write device SLG 42 up to 70 mm (medium power) 6GT2 001-0BA00 SLG plug connector and stub lines See chapter 3.10 Table 5-15 Technical data of SLG 42 Inductive interface to MDS Data transmission speed 19200 baud Read/write distance SLG to MDS (max.) 70 mm (see field data table) Transmission frequency S Power S Data 134 kHz Serial interface to ASM 6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w. DIN 43651 Transmission speed 19200 baud, RS 422 Line length, ASM to SLG (max.) at 24 V DC 120 m 1.81 MHz Supply voltage (via serial interface) Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Idle/operation 60 mA/180 mA MTBF 2 x 106 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-21 Read/Write Devices Table 5-15 Technical data of SLG 42 Housing Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 75 x 40 x 75 Color Gray Material Polyamide 12 Plug connection DIN 43651 Protection rating IP65 Shock 50 g Vibration 20 g Mounting of SLG 2 M5 screws Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 2 Nm Ambient temperature Field data During operation –25° to +70° C During transportation and storage –40° to +85° C Weight (approx.) 250 g Silicone free Yes The exact field data depend on the type of MDS used. Table 5-16 FCC information Field data of SLG 42 Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 55 mm Limit distance (Sg) 70 mm Median deviation (L) Depends on MDS Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) > 800 mm Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 42 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 5-22 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices Transmission window Length of transmission window (L) Figure 5-24 Metal-free space ÏÏÏÏ Î ÏÏÏÏ Î ÏÏÏÏ Î ÏÏÏÏ Î ÏÏÏÏ ÎÏÏÏÏ Î M Transmission window at operating distance M Transmission window of SLG 42 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ a a = 30 mm Metal-free space with flush installation a a a Figure 5-25 Metal-free space for SLG 42 Definition of distance D D SLG 42 SLG 42 D SLG 42 Figure 5-26 Distance D: SLG 42 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-23 Read/Write Devices 3.5 2.5 40 Dimensions (in mm) 75 25 5 65 75 5 49 ∅5 Figure 5-27 5-24 Dimensional diagram of SLG 42 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices 5.7 SLG 43 Application area The SLG 43 is a high-performance read/write device. This SLG is particularly suitable for use with large MDS types (i.e., MDS 506/MDS 439 E). The size of its transmission window is one of its primary features. The physical tolerances of conveyor systems can be well compensated for with this transmission window. In dynamic operation, the large transmission window permits large amounts of data to be read from or written to the MDS. See chapter 3.4. Figure 5-28 Ordering data Technical data Read/write device SLG 43 Table 5-17 Ordering data for SLG 43 Read/write device SLG 43 up to 150 mm (high power) 6GT2 001-0CA10 SLG plug connector and stub lines See chapter 3.10 Table 5-18 Technical data of SLG 43 Inductive interface to MDS Data transmission speed Read/write distance SLG to MDS (max.) Transmission frequency S Power S Data Serial interface to ASM Transmission speed Line length, ASM to SLG (max.) at 24 V DC 19200 baud 150 mm (see field data table) 134 kHz 1.81 MHz 6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w. DIN 43651 19200 baud, RS 422 85 m Supply voltage (via serial interface) Nominal value Permissible range Current consumption 24 V DC 21 to 30 V DC Idle/operation 60 mA/250 mA MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-25 Read/Write Devices Table 5-18 Field data MTBF 2 x 106 Housing Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) Color 238 x 40 x 80 Gray Material Plug connection Protection rating Shock Polyamide 12 DIN 43651 IP65 50 g Vibration Mounting of SLG Tightening torque (at room temperature) 20 g 4 M5 screws v 2 Nm Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage –25° to +70° C –40° to +85° C Weight (approx.) Silicone free 800 g Yes The exact field data depend on the type of MDS used. Table 5-19 FCC information Technical data of SLG 43 Field data of SLG 43 Operating distance (Sa) 0 to 100 mm Limit distance (Sg) Median deviation (L) Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) 150 mm Depends on MDS > 2000 mm Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY I SLG 43 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 5-26 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices Transmission window Transmission window at operating distance ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏ Length of transmission window (L) M Figure 5-29 Metal-free space M Transmission window of SLG 43 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ a b a b a > 50 mm b > 30 mm Metal-free space with flush installation h w 20 mm Non-metallic spacer Metal Although the SLG can be mounted directly on metal, the range may be reduced by up to 30%. This can be avoided by maintaining a distance of H > 20 mm to the metal. Figure 5-30 Metal-free space for SLG 43 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-27 Read/Write Devices Definition of distance D D SLG 43 SLG 43 D SLG 43 Figure 5-31 Distance D: SLG 43 Dimensions (in mm) 5.5 212 225 30 238 25 49 13 40 Figure 5-32 5-28 60 80 5 Dimensional diagram of SLG 43 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices 5.8 SLG 44 1 Application area The SLG 44 permits the MDS 507 data memory to be processed reliably from a great distance. This combination of SLG/MDS is particularly suitable for use in systems in which positioning to the MDS cannot be performed precisely at all or a long distance between SLG and MDS is required for safety reasons. The large transmission window between SLG and MDS opens up further application areas. In dynamic operation, large amounts of data can be transferred since the MDS remains in the transmission window for a long period of time. In addition, MDS 507 can still be processed with SLG 44 even at top speeds of 120 km/h. Figure 5-33 Ordering data Table 5-20 Read/write device SLG 44 Ordering data for SLG 44 Read/write device SLG 44 up to 1000 mm (long range) Configuration manual SLG 44/MDS 507 German English SLG plug connector and stub lines 1 6GT2 001-0DA10-0AX0 On “Software MOBY” CD See chapter 3.10 Only available now as spare part MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-29 Read/Write Devices Technical data Table 5-21 Technical data of SLG 44 Inductive interface to MDS Data transmission speed 19200 baud Read/write distance SLG to MDS (max.) 1000 mm (see field data table) Transmission frequency S Power S Data No power Serial interface to ASM 6-pin SLG plug connector in acc. w. DIN 43651 Transmission speed 19200 baud, RS 422 Line length, ASM to SLG (max.) at 24 V DC 270 m 1.81 MHz Supply voltage (via serial interface) Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Idle/operation 70 mA/110 mA MTBF 2 x 106 Housing Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 238 x 40 x 80 Color Gray Material Polyamide 12 Plug connection DIN 43651 Protection rating IP63 Shock 50 g Vibration 20 g Mounting of SLG 4 M5 screws Tightening torque (at room temperature) v 3 Nm Ambient temperature 5-30 During operation –25° to +70° C During transportation and storage –40° to +85° C Weight (approx.) 770 g MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices Field data The exact field data depend on the type of MDS used. Table 5-22 Field data of SLG 44 SLG 44 MDS 507 with Operating distance (Sa) 100 to 800 Limit distance (Sg) v 1000 Transmission window L 1200 Transmission window B (at Sa) 300 Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) > 6000 Interference-prone environments (e.g., frequency converters) may reduce the sensitivity of the SLG and thus affect the field data. See chapter 3.6.5. The field data are valid for a supply voltage of 24 V DC and a temperature range of 0° to 50° C. The field data may be reduced when temperatures are higher or lower. Transmission window ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏ ÏÏ Direction of movement of MDS Width of transmission window (B) Identification of field midpoint on SLG MOBY I Polarization direction MDS 507 SLG 44 SLG 44 Length of transmission window (L) Caution: Watch polarization direction. See also chap. 3.6. Figure 5-34 Transmission window of SLG 44 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-31 Read/Write Devices Metal-free space ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ a b MOBY I Polarization direction SLG 44 a a > 80 mm b > 40 mm Metal-free space with flush installation b h w 20 mm Non-metallic spacer Metal To reduce interference caused by the metal construction of the system, we recommend placing the SLG 44 on a non-metallic spacer with a height of at least 20 mm. Mounting on metal does not noticeably reduce the limit distance of the SLGs. Figure 5-35 Metal-free space of SLG 44 Definition of distance D MOBY I Polarization direction SLG 44 D MOBY I Polarization direction SLG 44 SLG 44 SLG 44 D MOBY I 5-32 Polarization direction Figure 5-36 SLG 44 SLG 44 Distance D: SLG 44 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Read/Write Devices Dimensions (in mm) 5,5 MOBY I 40±5 Polarization direction 30 Identification of field midpoint or polarization direction 225 18 25 238 Potentiometer to set sensitivity of the SLG (see chap. 3.6.5) SLG 44 13 40 10 5 60 80 LEDs for operation indicator Figure 5-37 LEDs for operation indicator All dimensions in mm Dimensional diagram of SLG 44 Yellow: Interference on SLG or MDS in boundary area. The LED also goes on briefly when the SLG performs a power startup. Green: MDS is in the field. The LED flashes in accordance with the parameterized time tABTAST. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 5-33 Read/Write Devices 5-34 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6 6-1 Interfaces 6.1 Introduction Application area ASM interfaces provide the link between MOBY I components (i.e., SLGs and MDSs) and higher level controllers (e.g., SIMATIC S5/S7), PCs or computers. Up to four SLGs can be connected depending on the interface used. Layout and functions An ASM consists of a microcontroller system with its own program stored on a PROM. The CPU receives commands via the user interface and stores these in the RAM. The user receives an acknowledgment that the command has arrived. When the command is correct, the CPU begins execution. 6-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Overview Table 6-1 ASM Type Overview of the interfaces Interfaces to PC/Computer Interfaces to SLG Function blocks SLG Connections Dimensions (WxHxD in mm) Temperature Range (During operation) Protection Rating 0 to+55 °C IP00 ASM 400/401 Can be instal- 9-pin sub D led S5-115 to socket 155U FB 250/252 FB 230 1 per CM 4 per ASM ASM 410 Can be installed in S5-100U/ ET 200U Can be connected via bus module opt.: FB 41 for ASM 410 2 (multiplex) 45 x 135 x 100 0 to+60 °C IP20 ASM 424 RS 232 RS 422 9-pin sub D socket MOBY-API 4 (parallel) 205 x 130 x 60 –25 to +55° C IP40 ASM 450 PROFIBUS DP 2 5-pin proximity switch plug connectors FB 240 FC 44 2 (multiplex) 134 x 110 x 55 0 to +55° C IP67 ASM 452 PROFIBUS DPV1 2 5-pin proximity switch plug connectors FC 45 FB 246 FC 46, FC 56 2 (pseudo parallel) 134 x 110 x 55 0 to +55° C IP67 ASM 454 PROFIBUS DPV1 9-pin sub D socket FC 45 4 (parallel) 205 x 130 x 60 –25 to +55° C IP40 ASM 456 PROFIBUS DP/DPV1 8-pin proximity switch plug connector FC 45 2 (parallel) 60 x 210 x 30 0 to +55° C IP67 ASM 470 Can be installed in S7-300/ ET 200M Via screw terminals FC 47 FB 47 2 (multiplex) 40 x 125 x 120 0 to +60° C IP20 ASM 473 Can be instal- 2 5-pin led in proximity ET 200X switch plug connectors FC 45 FC 56 1 87 x 110 x 55 0 to +55° C IP67 ASM 475 Can be instal- via screw led in terminals S7-300/ ET 200M FC 45 FC 56 2 (parallel) 40 x 125 x 120 0 to +60° C IP20 RF170C Can be installed in ET 200pro 2 M12 plug connectors FC 45 FC 55 FC 56 2 (parallel) 90 x 130 x 60 –25 to +55° C IP67 SIM V.24, RS 422, TTY (Integrated) 3964R Driver 75 x 75 x 40 0 to +60° C IP54 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-3 Interfaces 6.2 ASM 400/401 6.2.1 Overview Application area ASM 400/401 interfaces can be directly installed and operated in the following SIMATIC S5 programmable controllers. S S5-155U/F (all CPUs) S S5-135U (all CPUs) S S5-155U/H (all CPUs) Layout and function ASM 400/401 interfaces consist of the basic module in double Europe format and the CM 422 or CM 423 channel submodule. The basic module can be equipped with one to four channel submodules. Mixed configuration is not permitted. ASM 400 The ASM 400 with the CM 422 operates in the I/O area of the SIMATIC S5. When used with function block FB 250, up to 32 channel submodules (i.e., eight 4-channel interfaces) can be operated in one SIMATIC. When FB 252 is used, the maximum number of channel submodules is increased from 32 to 96 per SIMATIC S5. All MDS models can be processed via the FBs. The user addresses the data on the MDS via a command table in the data block. The user addresses user data via absolute addresses. Using the “dialog” function, two ASMs can exchange data via the SLG. ASM 401 The ASM 401 with the CM 423 operates in the page-frame area of the SIMATIC S5. If appropriately configured, the ASM 401 can be used as a communications processor. The ASM 401 uses function block FB 230. Up to 255 submodules (i.e., 1020 channel submodules) can be addressed on one SIMATIC S5. The data on the MDS are addressed by files with logical names (i.e., filehandler). 6-4 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces STG 4F ASM 400/401* with channel submodule CM 422/CM 423* SLG SLG MDS MDS Figure 6-1 Communication between ASM 400 and user program SLG MDS SLG MDS * With filehandler Configurator of ASM 400/401 Communication time between ASM 400 and user depends on two factors. S Cycle time and type of programmable controller S Software used (i.e., FB 230 and FB 250) Communication between ASM 400 and user can be divided into three steps. S The user issues a command and starts it. The next time the FB is called, the command is transferred to the ASM and acknowledged by the ASM. S The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user or the FBs are in wait status. Data communication with the MDS begins as soon as an MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG. The MDS data are stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness. S ASM communication with the MDS is concluded. When the FB is called the next time, the data which have been read or written are transferred from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finished message. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-5 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-2 Ordering data for ASM 400/401 Interfaces ASM 400/401 consisting of basic module and channel module CM 422/CM 423 Basic module with connection to STG 4F, with 4 insertion slots for channel module CM 422/CM 423, without channel module, mixed configuration not permitted 6GT2 002-0AA00 Channel module CM 422 6GT2 002-0AB00 Channel module CM 423 6GT2 002-1AB00 MOBY software1 with FB 230/250 6GT2 080-2AA10 ASM-SLG stub lines (see also chap. 3.10) 6GT2 091-0A... Accessories: Plug connector, ASM side 9-pin submin D plug connector with screw lock for customer cable making S 1 each S 10 each 6GT2 090-0BB10 Description-ASM 400/401 German English electronically available on “Software MOBY” CD Description-FB 230 for ASM 401 German English electronically available on “Software MOBY” CD Description-FB 250 for ASM 400 German English electronically available on “Software MOBY” CD 1 6-6 6GT2 090-0BB00 See chap. 7.1. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-3 Technical data of ASM 400/401 Channel Submodule CM 422 CM 423 Serial interface to SLG RS 422 Plug connector 9-pin sub D socket Max. interface/line length RS 422/1000 m, depending on SLG type No. of SLGs 1 SLG per CM Software functions Programming With STEP5 function block FB 250 FB 230 Read data, write data, initialize MDS Create file, read, write, delete, format MDS etc. Access directly via addresses Access via filehandler (similar to DOS) Dialog operation Yes No Supply voltage 5/24 V DC via internal bus Interfaces ASM 400/401 Commands Interfaces for CM/SLG ASM 400 (max.) 2 CM 422s ASM 401 (max.) 4 CM 423s (mixed configuration not permitted) Interface to STG 4F RS 422, 9-pin sub D socket Interface for 24 V DC 2-pin plug connector (included) Supply voltage Nominal value 5/24 V DC Permissible range Internal (at 5 V) 4.75 to 5.25 V DC External (at 24 V) 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption (max.) Internal (at 5 V) 1 channel 2 channels 3 channels 4 channels 370 490 610 730 mA mA mA mA External (at 24 V) 1 channel 2 channels 3 channels 4 channels 400 800 1200 1600 mA mA mA mA Fine-wire fuse M 1.25 A/250 V Ambient temperature 0° to +55° C During operation During transportation and storage –20° to +70° C < 95% Rel. humidity at 25° C Space requirements 1 SEP (1 SEP = 15.24 mm) Weight (approx.) ASM 400/401 0.44 kg CM 422/CM 423 0.1 kg MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-7 Interfaces Function block FB 250 Function block FB 250 controls data transmission between the STEP5 program and the ASM 400 interface module. FB 250 can be used on the following “programmable controllers.” S 115U/F-CPU 941/942/943/944/945 S 135U-R/S-CPU 928/928B S 155U/H-CPU 948 FB 250 does not use system commands. All MDSs can be processed with FB 250. Primary functions of FB 250 S Convert data from user parameterization structure to structure of an ASM S All communication with the ASM via command and data exchange S Preparation of errors for the user error handling: Command repetition Chaining of several partial commands into one complete command S Reading and writing with a user command S Any address areas of a mobile data memory can be processed with one command. S Control of PLC cycle load via the user Data transmission between FB and MDS can be divided into three phases. S Supply interface with the appropriate command and the data or parameters S Transmit the data between ASM 400 and MDS S Supply S5 with appropriate parameters or data from the interface If the P address area is not available, FB 252 also supports operation of the ASM 400 in the expanded Q address area. 6-8 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Function block FB 230 for ASM 401 By using the filehandler management system, the ASM 401 interface module simplifies data management of the mobile data memory for users of MOBY I identification systems. The filehandler appears to the user as an MDS operating system. It offers the following advantages (similar to the DOS filehandler management system). S The user addresses user data via logical names (i.e., file names) which can consist of up to 8 alpha-numerical characters. This eliminates absolute addressing of the data. S Related data are called files. S Management of differing file lengths S Specification of access rights to files S Create/delete/read/write (etc.) files A function block (i.e., FB 230) has been created so that the SIMATIC user can take advantage of the filehandler. Since this function block uses system commands, the following function blocks have been created for the PLCs listed below. S FB 230/234 for PLC 115U S FB 231 for PLC 135U S FB 232 for PLC 155U S FB 235 for PLC 155U (QUEUE-read command added) When the filehandler is used, the amount of user data on the MDS is reduced. The filehandler stores various management data on the MDS (e.g., system area, directory, and file allocation table). The following table shows how much user data is still available to the user. Table 6-4 Storage capacity of the mobile data memories when the filehandler is used Operating Mode MDS Type Max. Number of Files User Data 62-byte RAM 01 02 81 Without ECC Without ECC With ECC 1 2 1 27 12 7 128-byte EEPROM 03 83 Without ECC With ECC 3 3 60 45 2-Kbyte RAM 04 84 Without ECC With ECC 16 16 1680 1440 8-Kbyte EEPROM 05 85 Without ECC With ECC 32 32 7456 6464 32-Kbyte RAM 06 86 Without ECC With ECC 64 64 31488 27520 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-9 Interfaces 6.2.2 Hardware Description Plug connectors and their assignment Metal front plate Connection plug for the STG 4F service and test device Attention: STG I (see chap. 7.3) cannot be connected here. 3 LEDs per channel: Red LED Yellow LED Green LED Channel module no. 1 Channel module no. 2 9-pin sub D socket Plug Connector Assignment to SLG or STG 4F Screw for connection of channel module to basic module for EMC operation Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Hous. Designation Not used + Sending + Receiving Not used – Receiving – Sending Ground (0 V) +24 V Not used Cable shield Channel module no. 3 Connection plug for SLG 9-pin sub D plug connector with screw-type lock, order no. 6GT2 090-0BB00 Channel module no. 4 + 24 Volt GND Figure 6-2 6-10 24 Volt plug connector (This plug connector is included with the ASM.) Plug connectors and their assignment for ASM 400/401 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Switches and plug-in jumpers ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Switch 4 1 2 OFF = 0 ON = 1 X20 OFF = 0 ON = 1 8 1 4 1 8 x Switch 1 Address settings x Switch 2 Switch 3 Figure 6-3 1 and 2 must always be jumpered on X20. 1 Plug connector for SIMATIC bus Switches and plug-in jumpers for ASM 400/401 S4 = Setting of the type of addressing S2 = Setting of the page frame number S3 = Setting of the module address (linear addressing with PESP) S1 = Address setting when PESP is not used Table 6-5 Page Frame KH KY 00 0 01 02 Use of page frame addressing for FB 230 S4 S3 S2 S1 S1 4 3 2 1 1 2 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 OFF ON Not used 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 03 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 04 4 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 05 5 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 06 6 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 07 7 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 08 8 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 . . . . FD 253 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 FE 254 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 FF 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 . . . . . . Not used . . . . . . 6-11 Interfaces Table 6-6 Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252 ASM 400/401 Switch Setting Start Address of ASM 6-12 Switch S3 4321 Switch S4 21 FB 250 Parameterization ADR FB 252 Parameterization KAN* QADR KAN 0 0000 01 0 1-4 16 0001 16 32 0010 48 0011 64 0100 (Corresponds to chan channel module 1 to 4) 80 0101 96 0110 112 0111 128 1000 144 1001 160 1010 176 1011 192 1100 ( (This setting tti of switch 4 must Not always l available be used when the module is operated in standard 128 1-4 mode.) (Cor144 responds 160 to chan channel 176 module 192 1 to 4) 208 1101 208 208 224 1110 224 224 240 1111 240 240 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Settings on the channel module Hybrid for serial interface CM422 for ASM 400 Plug-in jumper X20 X21 not jumpered CPU 80C32 Hybrid for CM423 for ASM 401 serial interface Plug-in jumper X20 X21 jumpered CPU 80C32 EPROM EPROM Plug-in jumper X20: S Removed: Normal operation S Inserted: Test operation; dialog to the mobile data memory is aborted earlier when malfunctions occur. This helps to pinpoint weak spots and malfunctions during commissioning. Figure 6-4 Settings on the channel module Note The CM 422 cannot be upgraded to CM 423 or vice versa. In addition to jumper X21, several hardware changes must be made. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-13 Interfaces 6.2.3 SIMATIC S5 Configuration Module rack CR 700-0LA (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 MODY interface module ASM 4011 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-5 CR 700-0LA module rack (S5-115U) Module rack CR 700-0LB (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 MODY interface module ASM 4011 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-6 CR 700-0LB module rack (S5-115U) Module rack CR 700-1 (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 MODY interface module ASM 4011 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-7 6-14 CR 700-1 module rack (S5-115U) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Module rack CR 700-2 (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 MODY interface module ASM 4011 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-8 CR 700-2 module rack (S5-115U) Module rack CR 700-3 (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 MODY interface module ASM 4011 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-9 Module rack ER 700-0, ER 701-1 and ER 701-2 CR 700-3 module rack (S5-115U) MOBY interface modules ASM 400 and ASM 401 cannot be used. Module rack ER 701-3 Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 MODY interface module ASM 4011 ASM 314, AS 310, IM 317 IM 307 or IM 317 (only starting with ER 701-3LA13) 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400/401 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-10 ER 701-3 module rack (S5-115U) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-15 Interfaces Central controller S5-135U/155U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 MODY interface module ASM 401 Figure 6-11 S5-135U/155U central controller Central controller S5-155U/155H Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 MODY interface module ASM 401 Figure 6-12 S5-155U/155H central controller Expansion device S5-183U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 MODY interface module ASM 401 Interface 312-3 Interface 310 or 314 Figure 6-13 6-16 S5-183U expansion device for S5-135U/155U MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Expansion device S5-184U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 MODY interface module ASM 401 Interface 312-5 Figure 6-14 S5-184U expansion device for S5-135U/155U Expansion device S5-185U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 MODY interface module ASM 401 Interface 314 Figure 6-15 S5-185U expansion device for S5-135U/155U/155H Expansion device S5-187U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 MODY interface module ASM 401 Interface 312-5 Figure 6-16 S5-187U expansion device for S5-135U/155U MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-17 Interfaces 6.3 ASM 410 Application area Interface ASM 410 can be used in the SIMATICs listed below. S S5-90U (max. of 2) S S5-95U (max. of 4) S S5-100U (max. of 8) S ET 100U (max. of 2) S ET 200U (max. of 4) Since the ASM can be used with all mobile data memories, read/write devices and the STG 4F service test device, compatibility with all MOBY I components is ensured. Layout and function LEDs for status and error indications are located on the front. Interferenceimmune design is provided by the galvanic isolation of the MOBY I interface to the SIMATIC S5 bus. The MOBY commands are started and data are fetched by setting and scanning a few control bits in the process image (PIO/ PII), and eight input/output bytes are assigned. In time-multiplex operation, one or two SLGs can be used. The MDS data are accessed via their absolute addresses. Bus module of PLC S5-100U with ASM 410 STG 4F SIEMENS SIEMENS SLG SLG MDS Figure 6-17 6-18 MDS Configurator for the ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-7 Ordering data for ASM 410 Interface ASM 410 6GT2 002-0BA00 SIMATIC S5, bus module for 2 ASMs with Screw connection Crimp connection, with crimp contacts 6ES5 700-8MA11 6ES5 700-8MA22 Stub lines for ASM - SLG See also chap. 3.10 Description-ASM 410 German Englisch Technical data Table 6-8 6GT2 091-0D... electronically available on “Software MOBY” CD Technical data of ASM 410 Serial interface to SLG RS 422 Connection (max.) 2 SLGs 4x can be connected via a separate bus module. Line length (typ. max.) 1000 m/RS 422, depending on SLG and type of cable Number of SLGs S Static operation S Dynamic operation 2 SLG 4x Interface to STG 4F RS 422, 9-pin sub D plug connection Interface for 24 V DC Via a separate bus module 1 SLG 4x Software functions Programming With STEP5 directly via process image (PIO/PII); no function block required; 5 bytes processed per command Optional: FB 41 for ASM 410. This FB is available on the “MOBY Software” floppy disk. Description is provided by FB 250 documentation. Commands Select channel 1 or 2, read MDS, write MDS, initialize MDS, etc. Dialog operation Yes Supply voltage Nominal value 24 V DC (residual ripple, max. of 10%) Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption Internal (at 5 V) Typical 20 to 60 mA (20 mA = long cycle time) (60 mA = short cycle time) Max. 110 mA (PLC in STOP status) External (at 24 V DC) All SLGs switched off 90 mA Power consumption, typ. (without SLG) 2.5 W MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-19 Interfaces Table 6-8 Technical data of ASM 410 Cooling Convection cooling Isolation group C in acc. w. VDE 0110 Protection rating IP20 in acc. w. IEC 529 Physical stress IEC 68-2-27 Ambient temperature During operation S Horizontal SIMATIC layout S Vertical SIMATIC layout 0° to +60° C During transportation and storage –25° to +70° C Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 x 135 x 100 mm Weight (approx.) 0.25 kg 0° to +40° C Slot in PLC S5-90U PLC S5-90U provides a maximum of four slots for additional modules. Up to two of these can be used by the ASM 410 module. Slot in PLC S5-95U The ASM 410 can only be operated with PLC S5-95U in slots 0 to 7. Up to four modules can be used on one PLC. Starting with CPU release status -8MA-3, 8 modules can be used. Slot in PLC S5-100U S5-100U 6-20 The ASM 410 can only be operated with PLC S5-100U in slots 0 to 7. Up to eight modules can be used on one PLC. See the following table for slotoriented addressing. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 64 to 71 72 to 79 80 to 87 88 96 104 112 120 to to to to to 95 103 111 119 127 8 Slot number Address assignment Free slots for additional digital modules MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Configuration of ASM 410 in ET 100U The ASM 410 must be operated as an analog module in the ET 100U. When parameterizing the module with the “COM ET 100U” software, the module must be specified with “4AX” in the appropriate slot. The ASM 410 occupies eight input bytes and eight output bytes (i.e., 16 bytes). Since a maximum of 32 bytes can be assigned per ET 100U in the address image of the main controller, a maximum of two modules per ET 100U are permitted. When other modules are used with an ET 100U in addition to the ASM 410, only one MOBY I module can be connected. On the ET 100U, the ASM 410 can be addressed via all address areas of the PLC (i.e., P, Q, IM3 and IM4). SIMATIC C P U Central controller S5-115 U S5-135 U S5-155 U ET 100U Max. cable length 3000 m Max. of 2 ASM 410s per ET 100U ASM 410 ET 100U DI DO DO Max. of 32 ET 100Us Figure 6-18 Configuration of ASM 410 in ET 200U Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U The ASM 410 can be used with the ET 200U under the following conditions. S The ET 200U with an ASM 410 installed must be operated in slow mode. See ET 200U manual for how to set slow mode. S The “COM ET 200U” software is used to parameterize the ASM 410. The ASM 410 module must be parameterized there with “095”. S Up to four ASM 410s can be used with one ET 200U. When DI/DO or other periphery is used with the ET 200U, fewer ASM 410s can be used. Otherwise the same conditions as for the ET 100U apply. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-21 Interfaces Physical layout The ASM 410 interface has the same dimensions as any standard module for the SIMATIC S5-100U. The interface can be installed directly on the bus module (6ES5 700-8MA11 or 6ES5 700-8MA21). Ventilation slits of the adapter capsule: Make sure the ventilation slits are not obstructed during operation. Forced module ventilation is not required. Label insert: Short texts in English are on the back. LEDs A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 Fehler aktiv ANW 1.SLG 2.SLG Power 1 2 3 Betriebsart 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 8 A 4 C 2 0 E normal ECC Testbetr. Test+ECC INIT norm INIT ECC res. res. TEST 8 1.SLG bzw. 2.SLG 9 res. F 5 9 6 1 STG 6 Anschaltmodul MOBY I Status and error LEDs A B Operating mode selection switch Plug connector for serial S5 bus 9-pin sub D plug connector for connection of STG 4F with stub line 6GT2091-0B... (screw-type lock) Attention: STG I (see chap. 7.3) cannot be connected here. Coding pin (not visible; on back of module) in position “h” (i.e., analog module) 10-pin plug connector for bus module (24 V supply; SLG connection) 6GT2 002-0BA00 1 Figure 6-19 6-22 2 3 4 5 6 ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Table 6-9 No. Status and error LEDs of ASM 410 Color Meaning A1 Red Error: The last command was concluded with an error, or the hardware of the module is defective. A2 Yellow Rapid irregular flashing indicates running dialog with the SLG or mobile data memory (MDS). This LED is always on when the presence check is enabled. A3 Green Data memory is in the field of the SLG. The SLG which detected the MDS is indicated via LEDs B1-B2. LED is only active when presence check is being used. B1 Green B1 = 1st SLG is in operation. Remember: Only one of the LEDs (i.e., B1 or B2) may be on at a time. If both LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG. B2 Green B2 = 2nd SLG is in operation. Remember: Only one of the LEDs (i.e., B1 or B2) may be on at a time. If both LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG. B3 Green B3 = power on This LED is always on when 24 V is applied to the module. The interface module can be tested with the STG. Setting the operating mode The operating mode is set with the operating mode selection switch on the front of the ASM. Positions 0 to 7 Setting of the operating mode: ASM 410 uses the serial S5 bus. The STG interface is switched off. Positions 8 to F Test operation with the STG: Telegrams from the S5 are no longer processed. Note The serial S5 bus functions are not affected by switching to test operation since this interface has its own microprocessor and is not dependent on MOBY activities. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-23 Interfaces Table 6-10 Switch Setting 6-24 Operating modes for ASM 410 Short Description on Label Insert Description 0 Normal Normal operating mode; read and write all MDS types; ECC driver is disabled. 1 ECC driver Read and write all MDS types; EEC driver is enabled. 2 Test operation All MDS types can be processed during test operation. The ASM 410 performs stricter error checks for communication with the MDS so that weak points and malfunctions can be detected during commissioning. 3 Test + ECC The ECC driver is enabled. Otherwise same as switch setting 2. 4 INIT normal Initializes the MDS. When a write command is started via the process image, an INIT command to the MDS is started. The contents of the MDS are deleted. 5 INIT ECC Initializes the MDS with ECC driver. Otherwise same as switch setting 4. 6 Reserved – 7 Reserved – 8 Test 1st or 2nd SLG An STG can be connected via the 9-pin sub D plug connector so that all MOBY I hardware can be tested. 9 to F Reserved – MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Wiring of one or two SLGs BUS MODULE Mounting rail 1 3 5 7 9 2 4 6 8 10 Terminal strip on bus module Cable shield Shield +24 V Gn 0V Ye Color ID3 for stub lines from Siemens Wh Br Pk From external power supply Gr 1st SLG Max. cable length = 1000 m1 Gn Ye Wh Br Pk 2nd SLG Gr Stub line incl. SLG plug connector and open end with core sleeves 6GT2091-0D...2 1 Maximum cable length depends on the SLG and the tolerance of the external 24 V supply. 2 Lengths as per table 3-21 3 Color ID Gr = green = pin 4 in SLG plug connector; Ye = yellow = pin 5 in SLG plug connector; Wh = white = pin 6 in SLG plug connector; Br = brown = pin 1 in SLG plug connector; Pk = pink = pin 2 in SLG plug connector; Gr = gray = pin 3 in SLG plug connector Figure 6-20 Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-25 Interfaces 6.4 ASM 450/452 Application area The ASM 450/452 interfaces are modules for operation of MOBY devices via PROFIBUS DP / DPV1 on the following components. S All computers and PCs S All controllers When the interfaces are used on a SIMATIC S7, function blocks are available to the user. Figure 6-21 ASM 450 ASM 450/452 interface The ASM 450 accesses data on the MDS directly with physical addresses. The ASM 450 uses cyclic operation with function block FB 240 (S5) or FC 44 (S7). Appendix B of the FC 44 description is available to the SIMATIC S5 user. All other users must use the description of the FC 44 function for the ASM 450. Up to 2 SLGs can be connected to one ASM 450. Connection of two SLGs is only recommended when static operation is used. When MDSs are processed while passing by (i.e., dynamic operation), there is usually not enough time to switch over the second SLG. 6-26 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces ASM 452 The ASM 452 is the further development of the familiar ASM 450/451 interface modules. Use of non-cyclic data communication on PROFIBUS DPV1 ensures that optimum data throughput is achieved even with large PROFIBUS configurations. The minimum cyclic data load of the ASM 452 on PROFIBUS guarantees the user that other PROFIBUS stations (e.g., DI/DQ) can continue to work at very high speeds. Up to 2 SLGs can be run on the ASM 452 in pseudo parallel mode. Pseudo parallel mode means that the user can start one command on 2 SLGs at the same time (via FC 45) although the ASM has only one serial channel. The ASM automatically handles the multiplexing between SLG 1 and SLG 2. The SLG is processed on which an MDS happens to be. This delays the processing of the second MDS. For this reason, we recommend only processing the MDS statically when 2 SLGs are connected to the ASM. The MDS data are accessed via physical addressing of the MDS. The SIMATIC S7 offers FC 45 for this purpose. FC 45 gives the S7 user an easy-to-use interface with powerful commands (e.g., one command processes an entire MDS; command chaining; S7 data structures with UDTs). The ASM 452 can also be parameterized as a dialog station. Only 1 SLG can be used on channel 1 in this mode. The available memory (VMDS) is 1280 bytes. The MOBY I filehandler is also implemented on the ASM 452. The filehandler is a DOS-like file management system of the MOBY I identification system. It consists of a progam which is executed on the interface module. FC 46 or FC 56 (S7) or FB 246 (S5) are available to SIMATIC users. On PROFIBUS the ASM 452 exclusively uses non-cyclic mode via DPV1. This provides excellent data throughput. ASM 452 in ASM 451 mode The ASM 452 can be used in an ASM 451-compatible mode if you turn switch 8 to OFF (see figure 6-30). This means the GSD file siem804d can continue to be used. Note This mode only applies to systems which use the ASM 452 as a direct substitute for the discontinued ASM 451. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-27 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-11 Ordering data for ASM 450/452 ASM 450 interface for PROFIBUS DP, max. of 2 SLGs connectable 6GT2 002-0EB00 ASM 452 interface for PROFIBUS DPV1, max. of 2 SLGs connectable 6GT2 002-0EB20 Accessories Plug connector for PROFIBUS DP connection and 24 V power supply Connection cable, ASM 450/452 ´ SLG 2-m in length (standard); for other lengths see chapter 3.10.4. 6GT2 091-1CH20 Opt. connection plug, ASM 450/452 ´ SLG 6GT2 090-0BC00 M12 covering caps for unused SLG connection (only ASM 450 and ASM 452) 1 package = 10 each 3RX9 802-0AA0 MOBY software 1 with FB 246, FC 46, FC 56, FB 240, FC 44, FC 45, GSD file 6GT2 080-2AA10 Other accessories for ASM 450/452 (network components) See SIMATIC catalog ST 70 and SIMATIC ET 200X manual. Replacement part: Plug connector plate; T-functionality for PROFIBUS connection 6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0 Description-ASM 450/FC 44 German English French Electronically on “Software MOBY” CD Description-ASM 451/FC 46 German English Electronically on “Software MOBY” CD Description-FC 56 (filehandler) German English Electronically on “Software MOBY” CD Description-FC 45 (for ASM 452) German English French Electronically on “Software MOBY” CD Description-FB 246 for ASM 451 with S5 German 1 6-28 6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0 Electronically on “Software MOBY” CD See chapter 7.1. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-12 Technical data of ASM 450/452 ASM 450 ASM 452 (Normal Addressing) PROFIBUS DPV1 ASM 452 (Filehandler) Serial interface to the user PROFIBUS DP Procedure in acc. w. EN 50170, vol. 2, PROFIBUS Connection PG 11 screw connection PROFIBUS and supply voltage plug connectors are not included. Transmission speed 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud (automatic recognition) Max. block length 208 bytes 2 words cyclic/ 240 bytes acyclic PROFIBUS DPV1 2 words cyclic/ 240 bytes acyclic Serial interface to the SLG Plug connector 2 coupling plug connectors (M12) Line length (max.) 1000 m, depends on SLG (2 m = standard length, other cables: see chap. 3.10.4) SLGs which can be connected 2 SLG 4x (multiplex operation) 2 SLG 4x (pseudo parallel mode) 1 SLG 4x Software functions Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DP master Function blocks SIMATIC S5 FB 240 – FB 246 (for 155U with IM 308-C) SIMATIC S7 FC 44 FC 45 (Normal addressing) FC 46 (filehandler, no multitag) FC 56 (filehandler, with and without multitag) MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Direct access via addresses Access via file system similar to DOS Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS, and so on Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS, and so on Format MDS, read file, write file, and so on Dialog: Normal Station/VMDS Yes/no Yes/yes No/no (Only 1 SLG can be used on channel 1 in VMDS mode.) Dialog: memory size VMDS – 1280 bytes – Supply voltage Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption 180 mA (without SLG, DO not loaded) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-29 Interfaces Table 6-12 Technical data of ASM 450/452 ASM 450 ASM 452 (Normal Addressing) ASM 452 (Filehandler) Digital inputs Number 2 Galvanic isolation Yes None None None None Input voltage For logical “0” 0 to 5 V DC For logical “1” 13 to 30 V DC Input current for signal “1” 7 mA (typ.) Delay time < 10 msec Digital outputs Number 2 Galvanic isolation Yes Max. permissible current 0.5 A Short-circuit protection Yes (electronic) Line length (max.) 30 m Ambient temperature During operation 0° to +55° C During transportation and storage –40° to +70° C Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 134 x 110 x 55 (without bus plug) Mounting 4 M5 screws, mounting on any plate or wall Weight (approx.) 0.5 kg Protection rating IP67 6-30 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces AT-comp. PC PROFIBUS DP master module (e.g., S7-400 CPU) To additional PROFIBUS stations 2m 24 V for ASM and SLGs 2nd SLG (not for filehandler) 1st SLG MDS MDS * Standard cable length Figure 6-22 * PROFIBUS cable Configurator of ASM 450/452 Hardware description The ASM 450/452 is equipped with the same housing as the ET 200X decentral I/O device. See ET 200X manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA00-8AA0) for general technical information on the ASM 450/452 (e.g., mounting, operation and wiring, and general technical specifications). Accessories and power supply components are also described in this manual. PROFIBUS configuration The ASM 450/452 is integrated in the hardware configuration with a GSD file. The ASM can then be configured via HWCONFIG of the SIMATIC Manager or another PROFIBUS tool. The “Software MOBY” CD contains a separate GSD file for each ASM model. Operating mode of ASM 452 The GSD file describes the permissible modes of the ASM 452. The hardware configuration tool (e.g. STEP 7 HW-Config) is used to set the mode. SLG connection technique Since an SLG always occupies two M12 connection sockets on the ASM 450/452, a prefabricated cable (cf. figure 6-24 or chapter 3.10) makes it easy to connect the SLG. In its standard version, the connection cable has a length of 2 m. For other cable lengths, see chapter 3.10.4. An SLG plug connector with screw-type terminals is available for users who want to make their own cable (see figure 6-23). Cable and SLG plug connector can be ordered from the MOBY catalog. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-31 Interfaces Plug hood removed SLG-cable: 6GT2 090-0Ajjj PG11 screw connection, max. cable diameter = 6.5 mm (Do not tighten screw until plug connector is assembled.) 50 2 screws to open the plug connector 18.5 Protection rating IP67 Figure 6-23 Coupling connector M12 on ASM 1 2 3 4 5 6 S S Connection to Pin of SLG connector Core Color Connector Pin 5 6 S S 1 2 3 4 Green White Brown Yellow Gray Pink Not conn. Shield 4 6 1 5 3 2 - Connection plug, ASM 450/452/473 SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00) Two 5-pin, round M12 plug connectors SLG plug connector (socket) 2m * 25 X1/2 X1/3 18,5 X1/1 X1 X2 X1/4 X2/3 X2/1 White Brown Green Yellow Gray Pink 6 1 4 5 3 2 X1/5 * Standard cable length Figure 6-24 6-32 X2/5 Connection cable, ASM 450/452/473 SLG (6GT2 091-1CH20) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces PROFIBUS cable with 24 V power The ASM 450/452 can also be used with the “green” PROFIBUS cable. Make sure that a 24 V cable is installed from X12 to X13. The 24 V line on plug X12 can be connected to pin 5, 6. X12 X13 Figure 6-25 X12 X11 X13 X11 PROFIBUS cable with 24 V power MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-33 Interfaces SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452 Plug * Figure 6-26 2nd 3rd 4th 5th * SLG - SLG 2xDA SLG x3 – x4 - SLG 2xDE SLG SLG Normal addressing x3 x4 1st x1 – x2 Plug Filehandler x1 x2 Config Plug Config 1st 2nd 3rd * x1 – x2 SLG - SLG x3 – x4 - SLG SLG Config 1st x1 – x2 SLG x3 – x4 - This configuration only applies to static processing of the MDS. SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452 The versions shown in figure 6-26 can be set up with the standard cables of MOBY or ET 200X. Note Although the configuration with 2 SLGs + DI + DO is also possible with the ASM 450, the components require special customer-related wiring. The following figure shows a dimensional drawing of an ASM 450/452 with bus connection plugs. You must add the length of the PG screw connection and the radius of the cable used to the total width and depth specified. 110 53.5 28.25 Dimensional drawing of ASM 450/452 with mounting holes Ø 5.5 120 134 Figure 6-27 6-34 90 Dimensional drawing of the ASM 450/452 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Pin allocation The following figure shows the pin allocation of the ASM 450/452. ASM 450 LEDs for PROFIBUS DP SF: System fault (see table 6-13) BF: Bus fault (see table 6-13) ON: On when the logic voltage is present on ASM (is generated from the 24 V suply voltage) DC 24 V: On when the 24 V supply voltage is connected to ASM 4 56 X11 SF BF 12 3 4 56 ON DC 24 V X1 2 1 X12 SLG1 X2 3 RxD 5 4 ERR 12 3 ANW DI0 4 56 X3 DI1 SLG2 X13 X4 RxD 12 3 LEDs for MOBY and ASM 452 ASM 452 4 56 X11 SF BF ON DC 24 V 12 3 4 56 X1 2 1 X12 4 SLG1 X2 3 RxD 5 PRE/ERR 1 PRE/ERR 2 12 3 4 56 X13 X3 SLG2 X4 RxD 12 3 Socket X11 and X12 (PROFIBUS DP) X13 (Supply voltage) * Do not circuit Figure 6-28 LEDs for MOBY and ASM 450 RxD: SLG active ANW: MDS present or status of DA1 ERR: Error indication or status of DA0 SLG1/2: Indicates the selected SLG. Only SLG 1 or SLG 2 can be selected. DI0/1: Status of the digital inputs Pin Allocation 1 Signal B (red) 2 PE 3* PE 4 Signal A (green) 5* L+ 6* M 1 PE 2 L+ 3 M 4 PE 5 L+ 6 M RxD: SLG with command active PRE/ERR 1, MDS present or error PRE/ERR 2: indication for each SLG. (“MDS present” always takes priority. The error indication only appears when no MDS is present.) MDS present: The LED is permanently ON. If more than one MDS is in the field, the number of MDSs is indicated by brief interruptions of the light. No error output is made. Error indication: The LED is permanently OFF. The last error no. is indicated by brief pulses of light. SLG 1: SLG 1 is selected. SLG 2: SLG 2 is selected. Only SLG 1 or SLG 2 can be selected at one time. Socket X1/X3 X2/X4 Pin Allocation (SLG) 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 +RxD +TxD -TxD -RxD PE X2 + 24 V DO1 0V DO0 PE X4 + 24 V DI1 0V DI0 PE Pin allocation and LEDs of ASM 450/452 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-35 Interfaces Table 6-13 LED “BF” LED “SF” On * LED indication for PROFIBUS diagnosis Cause of Error S S S S S Error Handling ASM is starting up. – Connection to the DP master has failed. S Check PROFIBUS DP connection. S Check the DP master. S Check all cables in your PROFIBUS DP net- ASM found no baud rate. Bus failure work. DP master is out of order. S Check to determine whether connection plug for PROFIBUS DP is securely plugged into the ASM. Flashing On S The configuration data sent by the DP master to the ASM does not match the setup of the ASM. S Check the configuration of the ASM (input/ output, PROFIBUS address). S Correct GSD file used? (SIEM804C.GSD or SIEM80B6.GSD) Flashing On * Off S ASM has found the baud rate but is not S Check the PROFIBUS address on the ASM or S ASM was not configured. S Check the configuration of the ASM (station S The ASM has a hardware defect S Replace the ASM. addressed by the DP master. Flashing in the configuration software. type). Status is irrelevant. Example for bared lengths The following figure shows an example of bared lengths. The lengths are valid for all cables which you can connect to the connection plug. Any shield braiding must be twisted, inserted in a core end sleeve, and the excess cut off. 45 ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ Twisted and trimmed shield braiding 6 Figure 6-29 6-36 Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces PROFIBUS address and terminating resistance The plug plate must be removed from the ASM before you can set the PROFIBUS address or circuit the terminating resistance. The plug plate covers the DIP switches. The following figure shows the location of the DIP switches on the ASM and a sample setting of each. Example: Terminating resistance is off (status on delivery) on off Example: PROFIBUS address 120 (status on delivery) 23 +24 + 25 + 26 = 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 = 120 ASM 450 ASM 452 N. c. Normal operation ON N. c. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 6-30 ASM 451 – compatible (use GSD siem804d) Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the terminating resistance Note S The PROFIBUS address on the ASM 450/452 must always correspond to the PROFIBUS address specified for this ASM with the configuration software. S For correct functioning of the terminating resistance, always switch both DIP switches of the terminating resistance to “On” or “Off”. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-37 Interfaces 6.5 ASM 454/424 Application area The ASM 454/424 interfaces have been developed for decentralized setup with assembly lines. The attractive but robust housing fits anywhere. Up to four read/write devices from the MOBY I family can be connected and operated simultaneously. This ensures dynamic operation of the connected SLG. The user can choose between the following two interfaces. S PROFIBUS DPV1 (ASM 454) S RS 232, serial interface to the PC (ASM 424) Figure 6-31 ASM 454 ASM 454/424 interface The ASM 454 uses physical addresses to directly access the data on the MDS. The non-cyclic protocol service of PROFIBUS DPV1 is used for communication with the user. Function FC 45 is available to SIMATIC S7 users for easy integration. The description of the PROFIBUS DPV1 implementation is available for programmers of other controllers. See appendix of the FC 45 description. ASM 424 6-38 The ASM 424 uses physical addresses to directly access the data on the MDS. A serial RS 232 interface with the 3964R protocol is used for communication with the user. This makes it easy to connect external controllers to the MOBY I identification system. A C library (MOBY API) is available for the PC user for his/her applications. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-14 Ordering data for ASM 454/424 ASM 454 interface for use of MOBY I components via PROFIBUS DPV1, without filehandler 6GT2 002-2EE00 6GT2 002-2CE00 ASM 424 interface with serial interface RS 232/RS 422; 3964R procedure for PC, SICOMP and external controllers Accessories: RS 232 stub line between PC <–> ASM 424; can be fabricated up to a max. of 32 m based on the length key (see chapter 3.10.4). 6GT2 391-0B... SLG stub line (see chapter 3.10) 6GT2 091-0A... Plug connector for power supply (socket) for ASM 454/424 6GT2 390-1AB00 Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting 6GT2 390-0BA00 Wide-range power pack 100 to 230 V AC/24 V DC, 2.2 A (without 24 V cable) 6GT2 494-0AA00 24 V DC stub line for wide-range power pack 6GT2 494-0AA00 (see chapter 7.2) Length: 5 m 6GT2 491-1HH50 PROFIBUS plug connector 9-pin sub D conn. for 2 stub lines 6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0 (see catalog ST 70 or IK PI for more connectors) Software MOBY1 with C library for ASM 424 (MOBY API), and FC 45, GSD file for ASM 454 6GT2 080-2AA10 Description, FC 45 (for ASM 454) German English French Description, MOBY API (C-lib for ASM 424) German English 1 Electronically on “Software MOBY” CD Electronically on “Software MOBY” CD See chapter 7.1. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-39 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-15 Technical data of ASM 454/424 ASM 454 ASM 424 Serial interface to the user PROFIBUS DPV1 RS 232/RS 422 Line length (max.) See PROFIBUS configuration 30/500 m Procedure/protocol EN 50 170 vol. 2 PROFIBUS 3964R Connection 9-pin sub D socket (screw lock) Transmission speed 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud (automatic recognigion) 9.6; 19.2; 38.4 Kbaud (automatic recognition with 3964R) Max. block length 4 words (cyclic)/238 bytes (non-cyclic) 238 bytes Serial interface to the SLG 4 x 9-pin submin. D socket (screw lock) Line length Max. of 1000 m; depends on SLG (see chap. 3.10) Connectable SLG 4 x SLG 4x (parallel operation) Software functions Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DPV1 master MOBY API: C lib for PC with Windows 98/NT SIMATIC S7 function block FC 45 – MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS Dialog No (on request) No (on request) Supply voltage 6-40 Connection plug 4-pin M12 round plug (pin) Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption (max.) 250 mA (without SLG) Max. switch-on current 1.1 A (without SLG) UL/CSA Yes, when used with an NEC class 2 power supply Ambient temperature During g operation p Transportation and storage –25 to +55 °C (no ( condensation)) –40 to +85 °C (no condensation) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Table 6-15 Technical data of ASM 454/424 ASM 454 ASM 424 Housing Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 205 x 130 x 60 (without plug) Material Aluminum Color Anthracite Mounting 4 M5 screws Optional: Top hat rail mounting Tightening torque v 3 Nm Approx. weight 1300 g Protection rating IP40 (higher ratings on request) MTBF (at 40 ° C) 1 ⋅ 105 hours 6GT2 491-1HH50 24 V= 230 V PROFIBUS: Plug = 6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0 6GT2 494-0AA00 or other 24 V connection RS 232: PC cable = 6GT2 391-0B... RS 422: Make cable as shown in figure 6-34. 6GT2 091-0A... Figure 6-32 SLG SLG SLG SLG MDS MDS MDS MDS Configurator for ASM 454/424 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-41 Interfaces Pin assignment and switches RxD PRE ERR Plugs 1 to 4 to the SLG Socket 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Hous. RxD: SLG with active command PRE: “Presence” indicates presence of an MDS in the transmission window. ERR: Error indicated by flashing LED Figure 6-33 Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the SLG PROFIBUS SERIAL DC 24 V ON: (green) 24 V present on ASM SF/BF: (red) System fault/bus fault, RAM error ASM 424: flashes after power-on. Flashing stops after first real telegram. SF/BF ON ACT ACT: (green) ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 : Switch 7 ON: 26 Example: PROFIBUS address= 84 (22 + 24 + 26) Switch 1 to 7: Operating mode, serial interface 2 Switch 1 to 7 = 0FF: Default: 3964R Switch 1 to 7 ≠ 0FF: See other operating modes of the ASM 424 1 3 4 1 2 3 4 Designation Ground + 24V + 24V Ground 1 PROFIBUS Socket 1 2 3 4 5 6 Socket Switch 12: Presence check in 1-channel mode 2 ON: Presence check by firmware OFF: Presence check off 6-42 Pin 2 Designation Not used Not used B line (red) Request to Send (RTS) Ground 5 V (M5) Potential 5 V (floating, 60 mA) Not used A line (green) Not used Cable shield SERIAL 2 Switches 9 to 11: Not used Figure 6-34 DC 24 V 7 8 9 Hous. Switch 8: Interface 2 ON: RS 422 OFF: RS 232 Only for ASM 454 Only for ASM 424 This LED briefly flashes once when a command has been processed. 8 9 10 11 12 Switch 1 to 7: PROFIBUS address 1 Switch 1 ON: 20 Switch 2 ON: 21 1 2 Designation Not used + Sending + Receiving Nor used – Receiving – Sending Ground (0 V) + 24 V Not used Cable shield 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Hous. RS 232 RS 422 Not used TxD (sending) RxD (receiving) Not used Ground (0V) Not used Not used Not used Not used Cable shield Not used –TxD –RxD Not used Ground Not used Not used +TxD +RxD Cable shield Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the user MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Further operating modes of the ASM 424 Starting with release status C, the ASM 424 offers more operating modes. The expanded operating modes are set with switches 1 to 8 and 12. ON = 1 OFF = 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 Switches ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 s 0 0 1 Default; 3964R Serial interface = RS 232 Serial interface = RS 422 (Baud rates 9600, 19200 and 38400 are recognized automatically.) 0 0 y y y 0 1 s 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 2400 Baud 4800 Baud 9600 Baud 19200 Baud 38400 Baud 0 1 y y y m 0 s p 0 1 0 1 y y y 0 1 s * 1-channel mode**; 3964R Slave with 3964R Master with 3964R 0 1 Presence check off Presence check on p 1-channel mode**; LAUF driver* With the LAUF driver, each user byte is transferred with two ASCII bytes. Example: The data string with the user data 01 02 00 00 hex must appear on the line as shown below: 02 30 31 30 32 30 30 30 30 0A 03 (hex) STX ** LAUF driver* Channel (ASCII) User data (ASCII) CR ETX (opt.) 1-channel mode 1-channel mode is compatible with the ASM 420. In this mode the ASM 424 replaces an ASM 420. Only one SLG can be run on channel 1. The channel byte is omitted in the protocol. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-43 Interfaces Dimensional drawing with mounting holes 205 129 Grounding bolts (N4) Figure 6-35 Dimensional drawing of ASM 454/424 Adapter floor plate for top-hat-rail mounting Item 3 Quantity Floor plate 1 2 Profile 1 3 Oval headscrew, M5 x 10 4 4 Washer, A5.3 4 5 Countersunk screw, M4 x 10 2 4 5 Designation 1 1 2 Figure 6-36 Mounting diagram for the adapter floor plate Note To adjust to the particular situation, the profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90° and then installed on the floor plate. 6-44 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces 6.6 ASM 470/475 Application area The ASM 470/475 interface can be installed in the SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M. It can be used for all MOBY systems. Up to eight ASM 470/475 interfaces can be installed and operated in one module rack of the SIMATIC S7-300. When a layout with several module racks (maximum of four) is used, the ASM 470/475 can be installed and operated in each of these module racks. In a maximum SIMATIC S7-300 configuration, up to 32 ASM can be used centrally. The ASMs can also be used in the distributed I/O ET 200M on PROFIBUS. This makes use in an S7-400 environment possible. Up to 7 ASMs can be operated per ET 200M. Error messages and operational states are indicated with LEDs. Galvanic isolation between SLG and the SIMATIC S7-300 bus ensure layouts which are not as susceptible to interference. Figure 6-37 ASM 470 ASM 470/475 interface In multiplex operation, up to two SLGs can be connected to the ASM 470. The FC 47 function block ensures simple programming via SIMATIC S7 tools. The FC 47 can be used with both the S7-300 and the S7-400. The ET 200M can also be used to operate the ASM 470 in a SIMATIC S5 environment. FB 47 is available for PLCs 115U to 155U. On the hardware side, communication between ASM 470 and the S7-300 CPU is handled by a 16-byte address area so that up to 12 bytes of user data can be transferred with each read/write command. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-45 Interfaces ASM 475 The ASM 475 (order number 6GT2 002-0GA10) is a parameterizable module. This means the basic functions have already been specified when the module was configured in HW-Config (e.g., normal addressing or filehandler). ASM 475 (normal addressing) The ASM 475 accesses the data on the MDS directly with physical addresses. The FC 45 function controls use in a SIMATIC S7. ASM 475 (filehandler) The MOBY I filehandler is implemented on the ASM 475. The filehandler is a file management system similar to DOS for the MOBY I identification system. It consists of a program which is executed on the interface module. The MDS and SLG MOBY I components are identical, with and without filehandler. The FC 56 function controls operation in a SIMATIC S7. Together the ASM 475 and FC 45 form a unit which can be used to read the MDS data easily and at optimum speed. A 32-Kbyte MDS memory can be read in 24 seconds, almost without regard to the S7 cycle time. ASM 470 ASM 475 Shield connecting element (6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0) for 2 modules Shield connection terminal (6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0) 6GT2 091-0E... (see chap. 3.10 or figure 6-40) Figure 6-38 6-46 SLG SLG MDS MDS Configurator for ASM 470/475 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-16 Ordering data for ASM 470/475 Interface ASM 470 for SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG multiplex; no front plug 6GT2 002-0FA10 Interface ASM 475 for SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG parallel; normal addressing; no front plug 6GT2 002-0GA10 Accessories Front connector (1 per ASM) 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0 Shield connection terminal (1 per SLG cable) 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0 Shield connecting element (1 per 2 ASMs) 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0 Connection cable, ASM ↔ SLG 6GT2 091-0E... MOBY software1 with FC 47, FB 47 for ASM 470, FC 45 for ASM 475 with normal addressing FC 56 for ASM 475 with filehandler 6GT2 080-2AA10 Description-ASM 470/FC 47 for S7 German English Electronically on the “Software MOBY” CD Description-ASM 470/FB 47 for S5 German Englisch Electronically on the “Software MOBY” CD Description-FC 45 (ASM 475) German Englisch French Description-FC 56 (ASM 475, filehandler) German Englisch 1 Electronically on the “Software MOBY” CD Electronically on the “Software MOBY” CD See chapter 7.1. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-47 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-17 Technical data of ASM 470/475 ASM 470 ASM Type Interface to S7-300 or ET 200M ASM 475 (Normal Addressing) ASM 475 (Filehandler) P-bus; I/O input and I/O output P-bus; cyclic and non-cyclic services Communication 16 bytes I/O 2 words (cyclic); 238 bytes (non-cyclic) Command buffer on ASM 1 x 12 bytes per ASM 70 x 238 bytes per SLG 1 x 238 bytes per SLG Serial interface to the SLG Plug connector Via screw terminals on front plug Front plug connector is not included. Line length, max. Standard cable = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m (up to 1000 m on request) MOBY systems supported I/E/F/V I/E/F/U I/U Connectable SLGs Multiplex 2 x SLG Parallel 2 x SLG Parallel 2 x SLG Software functions Programming SIMATIC user: With FC/FB Other users: Telegram description as per appendix of FC description Function block SIMATIC S7 FC 47 FC 45 FC 56 SIMATIC S5 FB 47 – – MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Access via logical file names Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS Format MDS, read file, write file, etc. MOBY I dialog: Normal station/VMDS Yes/yes No/no PROFIBUS diagnosis Yes. Can be parameterized via RESET. S7 diagnosis No Yes. Can be called via S7 OM. Firmware reloadable No Yes. Via SIMATIC Manager. Yes/no Power supply Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC 20.4 V to 28.8 V DC S Without SLG at 50 mA 350 mA S With SLG connected Max. of 600 mA with one SLG Max. of 300 mA per SLG when two SLGs are connected Max. of 500 mA per connected SLG Current consumption U = 24 V DC, max. 6-48 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Table 6-17 Technical data of ASM 470/475 ASM Type ASM 470 Power loss of the module, typical ASM 475 (Normal Addressing) ASM 475 (Filehandler) 1W 2W Current consumption from P-bus, max. 100 mA 80 mA Galvanic isolation between S7-300 and MOBY Depends (100 kΩ between S7-300 and 24 V DC) Yes. Use for ungrounded operation of a separate power pack for the ASM. Fuse, 24 V to SLG Yes. Electronic. Yes. Electronic. Ambient temperature During operation S SIMATIC horizontal 0° C to +60° C S SIMATIC vertical 0° C to +40° C During transportation and storage –40° C to +70° C Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 40 x 125 x 120 Weight, approx. 0.2 kg Wiring The ASM 470/475 is commissioned with the following steps. S Mount module S Mount module on the S7-300 mounting rail. See S7-300 manual. Note The CPU of the S7-300 must be switched to STOP status before the module is mounted. ! Warning The S7-300 may only be wired when the voltage is off. Note To ensure interference-free operation of the ASM 475, make sure that ASM and SIMATIC CPU (or ASM and IM 153 with ET 200M) are run on the same voltage. Non-adherence may cause possible error messages on the CPU not to be cleared when the ASM is turned on. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-49 Interfaces Front panel The following figure shows the front plate of the ASM 470/475 and the inside of the front door with the related connection diagram. The SLGs must be connected to the ASM as shown in the connection diagram. MOBY MOBY ASM470 SF ASM475 SF DC5 V 24 V ANW ACT_1 Active T+ PRE_1 T– SLG 1 RxD_1 SLG 1 ERR_1 Error R+ RxD R– T+ T– Error ERR_2 SLG 2 PRE_2 RxD RxD_2 6GT2 002-0FA10 R+ R– 6GT2 002-0GA10 Status and error indicators Figure 6-39 SLG 2 ACT_2 Connection diagram The numbers for the connection are based on plug connector X1 located on the upper part of the housing. Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475 Indicator elements on ASM Table 6-18 Function of the LEDs on ASM 470/475 ASM 475 ASM 470 Meaning SF SF System fault (hardware error on ASM) 24 V DC 5 V 24 V are connected to ASM. 5 V voltage on ASM is okay. Active ACT_1, ACT_2 The appropriate SLG is processing a user command. 6-50 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Table 6-18 Function of the LEDs on ASM 470/475 ASM 470 ASM 475 Meaning Error ERR_1, ERR_2 The flashing pattern shows the last error. This indicator can be reset with the option_1 parameter. ANW PRE_1, PRE_2 Indicates the presence of an MDS RxD RxD_1, RxD_2 Indicates communication to the SLG . Interference on SLG can also cause this LED to light up. SLG 1, SLG 2 – Indicates the SLG which was selected by the user command. Only one LED may light up at a time (multiplex operation). Additional operational states are indicated on the ASM 475 on the LEDs PRE, ERR, and SF. Table 6-19 SF Additional LEDs on the ASM 475 PRE_1 ERR_1 PRE_2 ERR_2 Description, Causes, Remedy ON OFF/ON ON (perm.) OFF/ON ON (perm.) Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, ...) ON OFF ON OFF OFF Loader is defective (can only be fixed at the plant). OFF 2 Hz OFF 2 Hz OFF Firmware is being loaded or no firmware detected. → Load firmware. → Do not turn off ASM. OFF 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz Firmware loading terminated with error → New start required. → Load firmware again. → Check update files. Any 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz Operating system error → Turn ASM on/off. OFF OFF 1 x flash every 2 sec OFF 1 x flash every 2 sec ASM has booted and is waiting for a RESET (init_run) from the user. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-51 Interfaces Wiring to the SLG The figure below shows a connection cable between ASM and SLG. The colors apply to the standard MOBY cable for the ASM 470. See chapter 3.10.3. Front plug connector of ASM (6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0) Cable with core sleeves SLG plug connector (socket) White 4 (12) Brown 5 (13) Green 6 (14) Yellow 7 (15) Pink 8 (16) Grey 9 (17) 6 1 4 5 2 3 (Shield) Cable shield bared Figure 6-40 Wiring of ASM 470/475 to SLG (6GT2 091-0E...) Shield connection See chapter 3.9 or figure 6-38. Lightning protection Implement the lightning protection and grounding measures required for your application. Lightning protection measures always require individual consideration of the entire system. Customer cable fabricating To ensure EMC, the SLG cable must be led over an S7-300 shield connecting element. When customers make their own cables, the shield of the SLG cable must be bared as shown in figure 6-41. 30 Figure 6-41 6-52 170 Specifications in mm Baring of the cable shield when customer makes own cable MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Configuration of ASM for SIMATIC S7 under STEP 7 Note Installation of MOBY requires functional STEP 7 software on the PC/PG. Installation and configuration of the ASM 470/475 in the SIMATIC is handled by an installation program. The installation program is included with the “MOBY software” product (6GT2 080-2AA10). Installation The “Software MOBY” CD contains the installation files in subdirectory S7_om. Installation is almost completely automatic when Setup.exe is called. The specified steps during SETUP must be responded to. Note Remember that you will have to execute a separate Setup for installation of ASM 470 and ASM 475. The ASM 470/475 module is located in the hardware catalog of HWCONFIG under the following subdirectory for hardware configuration of the SIMATIC S7. SIMATIC 300 SM 300 Special 300 MOBY ASM470 MOBY ASM475* 6GT2 002-0GA00 * Discontinued Figure 6-42 MOBY ASM475 PARAM 6GT2 002-0GA10 ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-53 Interfaces FC 45/47 with sample project You can use the file-dearchivation function of the SIMATIC Manager to load the FC with a sample project from the applicable subdirectory of the “Software MOBY” CD. Afterwards, the sample project is located in the directory S7PROJ of the SIMATIC Manager. ASM Type 6-54 Directory in “Software MOBY” Project Name in SIMATIC Manager Path Name in SIMATIC Manager ASM 470 FC47 ASM470_CPU416 ASM470_C ASM 475 FC45 MOBY FC45 Moby_f_1 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces 6.7 ASM 473 Application area The ASM 473 interface is a MOBY module for the SIMATIC S7. It can be installed in the ET 200X and DESINA distributed I/O device. The interface of the ET 200X to the user is PROFIBUS DPV1. An S7-300 or S7-400 with integrated PROFIBUS connection can be used as the controller. The ASM 473 supplements the SIMATIC S7 MOBY interface modules ASM 470 and ASM 475. Its protection rating of IP67 permits it to be set up and operated directly in the process without additional protection. Other features: S Up to 7 ASM 473s can be operated in one ET 200X station. S All I/O modules from the ET 200X family can be run parallel to the ASM 473. ASM 473 (normal addressing) The MDS data are accessed by physically addressing the MDS. ASM 473 (filehandler) The MOBY I filehandler is implemented on the ASM 473. The filehandler is a file management system similar to DOS for the MOBY I identification system. It consists of a program which is executed on the interface module. The MDS and SLG MOBY I components are identical, with and without filehandler. The FC 56 function controls operation in a SIMATIC S7. The FC 45 function is available for use in a SIMATIC S7. The hardware configuration of the ASM 473 is performed with an Object Manager which is integrated in the SIMATIC Manager. Figure 6-43 ASM 473 interface MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-55 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-20 Ordering data of ASM 473 ASM 473 interface module 6GT2 002-0HA10 Accessories: SLG cable (2 m = standard cable) For other lengths, see chapter 3.10.4 6GT2 091-1CH20 Opt. ASM connection plug without SLG cable (for cable lengths up to 1000 m) 6GT2 090-0BC00 Software MOBY with 1 6GT2 080-2AA10 FC 45 for normal addressing FC 56 for filehandler Description of FC 45 Electronically on “Software MOBY” CD German English French Description of FC 56 Electronically on “Software MOBY” CD German English 1 Technical data See chapter 7.1. Table 6-21 Technical data of ASM 473 Normal Addressing Filehandler Interface to ET 200X SIMATIC S7 P-bus Cyclic and non-cyclic services Communication 2 words (cyclic)/ 238 bytes (non-cyclic) Command buffer in ASM 70 x 238 bytes 1 x 238 bytes Serial interface to SLG 6-56 Plug connector 2 x coupling plug, M12 Line length, max. 20 m 2 m = standard length Other fabricatable cables = 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m (up to 1000 m on request) Connectable SLGs 1 x SLG 4x MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Table 6-21 Technical data of ASM 473 Normal Addressing Filehandler Software functions Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DP master SIMATIC S7 function block FC 45 FC 56 MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Access via logical file names Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS Format MDS, read file, write file, etc. MOBY I dialog: Normal station/VMDS Yes/no No/no PROFIBUS diagnosis Yes; ET 200X basic station. S7 diagnosis Yes. Can be called via S7 OM. Reloadable firmware Yes. Via SIMATIC Manager. Power supply Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20.4 V to 28.8 V DC Current consumption S From encoder 75 mA, typical S From load voltage Max. of 500 mA (or see technical data of connected SLG) Power loss of module 1.6 W, typical Digital inputs Via expansion modules from ET 200X family Digital outputs Via expansion modules from ET 200X family voltage (SLG power) Ambient temperature During operation 0° C to +55° C During transportation and storage –40° C to +70° C Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm Dimensions of single devices 87 x 110 x 55 Dimensions of scale 60 x 110 x 55 Mounting 2 M5 screws (customer) 2 M3 screws (device) Protection rating IP67 Weight 0.275 kg MTBF (at 40° C) 106 hours For setup guidelines and other general technical data, see the ET 200X manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0). MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-57 Interfaces Configuration PROFIBUS DP master module (e.g., S7-400 CPU) (Connection of other master is under preparation.) PROFIBUS cable to all PROFIBUS slaves 2 m (standard cable length) Basic module BM 141 BM 142 BM 143 BM 147 24 V for ET 200X electronics and MOBY-SLG Figure 6-44 SLG MDS Configurator for an ASM 473 Note In contrast to ASM 45x (see figure 6-22), the 24 V power must be provided on the PROFIBUS plug and the load voltage plug. For details, see ET 200X manual. 6-58 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Basic module – prequisites for use of ASM 473 The following table shows the status of the ET 200X basic modules as of 10/2002. The functions of new basic modules are stored in HW-Config of SIMATIC Manager. Table 6-22 Prerequisites for use of ASM 473 Can Be Run with ASM 473 (6GT2 002–0HA00)* Can Be Run with ASM 473 PARAM (6GT2 002-0HA10) 6ES7 141-1BF00-0XB0 No No 6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0 No No 6ES7 141-1BF10-0XB0 No No 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 142-1BD10-0XB0 No No 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0 No No 6ES7 142-1BD20-0XB0 No No 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0 No Yes** 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0 No No 6ES7 147-1AA01-0XB0 No Yes Order Number of ET 200X Basic Module * ** Discontinued Prerequisites for use: Please parameterize the module 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 in HW-Config. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-59 Interfaces Up to 7 ASM 473s can be operated in one ET 200X. Figure 6-45 Maximum configuration of ASM 473 on an ET 200X Depending on the PROFIBUS master, up to 123 ET 200X modules can be run on one PROFIBUS branch. Hardware configuration The ASM 473 is integrated in the hardware configuration of SIMATIC Manager by calling Setup.exe in the directory Daten\S7_OM on the “Software MOBY” CD. Currently, the ASM 473 cannot be integrated in other masters. SLG connection An SLG always occupies the two M12 connection sockets (X3 and X 4) on the ASM 473. A prefabricated cable (cf. figure 6-24 or chapter 3.10) ensures easy connection of the SLG. The standard version of this cable is 2 m in length. Other lengths are available on request. An SLG connection plug with screw terminals (see figure 6-23) is available for users who want to make their own cable. Cable and SLG connection plug can be ordered from the MOBY catalog. 6-60 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Pin assignment The following figure shows the pin assignment to the SLG and the indicator elements. Socket Pin assignment (SLG) X3 1 2 3 4 5 +RxD +TxD –TxD –RxD PE X4 1 2 3 4 5 +24 V n. c. 0V n. c. PE LEDs for PROFIBUS DP General operational indicators (SF, BF, ON, DC24 V) are located on the basic module of the ET 200X. LEDs for MOBY RxD: SLG is busy with a command. PRE: Indicates the presence of an MDS ERR: Flashing pattern (see appendix B.1) indicates error. Additional operational states of the ASM are indicated on the LEDs PRE and ERR. PRE ERR Description, Causes, Remedy OFF/ON ON (perm.) Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, ...). ON OFF Loader is defective (can only be repaired at the plant). 2 Hz OFF Firmware is being loaded or no firmware detected. → Load firmware. → Do not turn off ASM. 2 Hz 2 Hz Firmware loading terminated with error → New start required. → Load firmware again. → Check update files. 5 Hz 5 Hz Operating system error → Turn ASM or ET 200X basis station off/on. OFF ASM booted and is waiting for a RESET (init_run) 1 x flash every 2 sec from the user. Figure 6-46 Pin asssignment and LEDs of ASM 473 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-61 Interfaces The figure below shows the dimensions for the positions of the holes for the screws. This information applies to a basic module and an expansion module (ASM 473). 120 n 126.8 BM 141/142 60 87 110 53.5 28.25 Dimensions for the mounting holes For M5 mounting screw ASM 473 n = number of expansion modules Figure 6-47 6-62 Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces 6.8 SIM Serial Interface Module Application area SIM (i.e., Serial Interface Module) is a general-purpose module for operation of MOBY I via a serial interface on any of the components below. S Computers S PCs S PLC of other manufacturers Its sturdy housing permits it to be used in rugged environments and makes it resistant to many chemical substances. Layout and function SIM combines an ASM interface and an SLG read/write device in one housing. It is available with one of three interfaces (i.e., RS 422, TTY or V.24). All SIM models can be operated with various procedures (i.e., 3964R, Lauf, SINEC L1 and the SINUMERIK protocol). AT-comp. PC SIEMENS SITOP power 2.5 6GT2 332-1SH12 Cable length ≤ 3 m SIM MDS Figure 6-48 Configurator for SIM The connecting cable between the power supply unit and the SIM may not exceed a length of 3 m. Power supply units which are to be operated in connection with a SIM must have a feedback attenuation of at least 20 dB at 134 kHz. One suitable power supply unit is, for example, the SITOP power 2.5 from Siemens (order number 6EP1 332-1SH12). MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-63 Interfaces SIM hardware The transmission window for all MDS types is located above or below the Siemens label. Plastic housing of polyamide 12 Screw-type lock (for all interface models) (inch threading 2.54 mm) Diagonal mounting holes for M5 screws Figure 6-49 Ordering data Table 6-23 25-pin sub D plug connector for: – Serial interface – Baud rate setting – Specification of the transmission procedure – Control of the data carrier − Voltage supply of the module (24 V DC) SIM serial interface module Ordering data for SIM Serial interface module SIM consisting of ASM interface and read/write device 6GT2 005-0AA10 SIM 41 with V.24 (RS 232) interface SIM 42 with RS 422 (RS 485, V.11) interface 6GT2 005-0BA10 6GT2 005-0CA10 SIM 43 with TTY (20 mA linear current) interface MOBY software1 with 3964R drivers and tools for DOS and Windows 95/NT 6GT2 080-2AA10 25-pin submin. D plug connector (not included) 6AW5 418-4F Stub lines and accessories See chapter 3.10 Description-SIM German English Electronically on “Software MOBY” CD Description-T3964R (DOS), stapled German English Electronically on “Software MOBY” CD 1 6-64 See chapter 7.1. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-24 Technical data of SIM serial interface module Serial interface 25-pin subminiature plug connector Transmission speed 2400 to 9600 baud Procedure 3964R, SINEC L1, Lauf and SINUMERIK protocol Line length (typ. max) 1000 m (shielded) TTY 1000 m ((shielded) hi ld d) RS 422 30 m (shielded) V.24 Software functions Commands Programming Digital inputs Number Galvanic isolation Input voltage For logical “0” For logical “1” Delay time Digital outputs Number Galvanic isolation Read MDS, write, initialize, scan DI/DO, Next Depends on computer, PC or PLC of other manufacturer. 3964R driver with interface to MS-C available for PC. 3964R driver also available for Windows 95 and Windows NT. Via 25-pin sub D plug connector 2 No –2 to +5 V +12 to +33 V (Ri = 10 kΩ) < 10 msec Via 25-pin sub D plug connector 2 No (internal voltage supply) short-circuit proof Imax = 200 mA (per DO; or for 2 DO) Inductive interface to MDS (integrated SLG) Read/write distance between SLG - MDS Transmission frequency S Power S Data Supply voltage Nominal value Permissible range Current consumption (max.) Permissible shock stress Protection rating in acc. w. IEC 529 Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm Weight (approx.) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Max. of 40 mm, see field data 134 kHz 1.81 MHz Via 25-pin sub D plug connector 24 V DC 20 to 30 V DC 220 mA (DO not loaded) 30 g IP54 (with special plug connector) 0° to +60° C –20° to +70° C 75 x 75 x 40 0.3 kg 6-65 Interfaces Field data of SIM All technical data listed here are typical data and apply to a room temperature of 25° C, a supply voltage of 24 V and a metal-free environment. Tolerances of + 20% are permitted for special production conditions or temperatures. Table 6-25 Field data of SIM MDS 506 MDS 514 MDS 439 E Length of transmission window in mm (L) L 2L L 2L L 2L 60 80 85 100 75 100 Width of transmission window in mm (W) 20 30 30 Operating distance in mm (Sa) 0 to 20 0 to 25 0 to 25 40 33 Limit distance in mm (Sg) 33 Distance from MDS to MDS in mm (D1) >200 Minimum distance from SIM to SIM ! Metal-free space >300 >300 D > 700 mm Caution Adherence to the value specified here is essential. If this value is underranged, there is a danger that the inductive fields will be affected. The time for the data transmission would be increased by an incalculable amount of time or a command would be terminate with errors. SIM can be mounted on metal without adversely affecting its range. Metal Metal-free a Flush installation in metal requires a metal-free space of a = 30 mm. Figure 6-50 6-66 Flush installation of SIM in metal MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Transmission window 2L ÜL Sg Sa MDS View of side 2L L View of top Transmission window in metal-free surroundings Transmission window for Sa Figure 6-51 Transmission window of SIM Dimensions (in mm) 40 21 6 47 75 4 7.7 75 65 75 5 5 Figure 6-52 5.5 Housing color: Gray Housing material: Polyamide 12 Dimensions of SIM serial interface module MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-67 Interfaces Plug connector assignment The 25-pin subminiature D plug connector is used for the following purposes. S Voltage supply of SIM S Connection to PC/computer S Parameterization of SIM Table 6-26 Overview of plug connector assignment for SIM Meaning Pin Pins 1 to 8 Connection of SIM to a computer or PC Interface (depends on type) 1 SIM 41 → V.24 (RS 232) SIM 42 → RS 422 (V.11) SIM 43 → TTY (only passive) 1 – R * (terminal resistance) + EM (receiving) 2 TxD (Transmit Data) E + (receiving) – EM (receiving) 3 RxD (Receive Data) D + (sending) + SE (sending) 4 – R – (terminal resistance) – SE (sending) 5 – D – (sending) –1 6 Not used Not used Not used 7 GND (signal ground) E – (receiving) – 8 Plug housing shield Plug housing shield Plug housing shield 9 10 11 12 DI0 DI1 DO0 DO1 13 + 24 V 14 0 V (ground) 15 Not used 16 Not used 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 S ground: S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 Two digital inputs and outputs each (e.g., for data carrier control) Voltage supply of SIM (20 V to 30 V) Cable length between the power supply unit and the SIM: max. 3 m 0 V for plug connector pins 18 to 25 For setting: − Baud rate – SINEC L1 address – Transmission procedure – Type of MDS control SIM 43 with TTY: Pin 5 of the connection plug may not be wired. 6-68 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Interfaces Parameterization of pins 17 to 25 Plug pin*) Meaning 24 25 1 1 No data memory control. Presence check is switched off. The DI/DO can be programmed as desired with the system command. 1 0 Presence check by firmware of SIM DIs can be used as desired. They can be scanned with the DI/DO command. 0 1 Presence check via DI0 and DI1, whereby DI0 = 1 → MDS entering DI1 = 1 → MDS leaving 0 0 Presence check via DI1, whereby DI1 = 1 → MDS leaving DI0 is free and can be scanned with the status command. Plug pin*) Meaning 18 19 20 21 22 23 a a a a 0 0 SINEC L1 aaaa = Address of SIM on the SiNEC L1 bus (SIM is always the slave.) Pin *) 21 20 19 18 Address allocation: 1 1 : 0 1 1 : 0 1 1 : 0 1 0 : 0 b b 0 0 1 0 Lauf procedur 1 0 0 1 1 0 STG connection b b b b 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 3694R: SIM = Slave 3694R: SIM = Master b b a a 0 1 SINUMERIK 850/880-protocol (without reaction telegram) Pin *) 20 21 SIM-Address (=a a) 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 2 3 SINEC-Address 1 2 : 16 (always present) Caution: When SINUMERIK is used, a kind of presence check must be switched on with switches 7 and 8. 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x x x x x x x *) no jumper Jumper to pin 17 x x x x x x x x Baud rate 9600 Baud 4800 Baud 2400 Baud (Reserved) (= bb) (Applies to Lauf, 3964R and SINUMERIK procedures) → log. “1” → log. “0” MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6-69 Interfaces 6-70 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Accessories MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 7 7-1 Accessories 7.1 MOBY Software Starting with version 3.0, the “MOBY Software” product will be delivered on CD. All function blocks and drivers for the MOBY identification system are included. The “Les_mich” (i.e., read_me) file in the main directory of the CD gives a brief explanation of the programs listed below. S FB 230: Function block for ASM 401; filehandler for SIMATIC S5 S FB 240: Function block for ASM 450; MOBY on PROFIBUS DP with SIMATIC S5 (including master device file for PROFIBUS DP) S FB 250: Function block for ASM 400 S FB 41 contains a function block for the ASM 410. The call interface of this function block is almost identical to that of FB 250. See the description of FB 250 for programming. S FC 44 permits the ASM 450 to be used in a SIMATIC S7 environment. Be sure to read the “Read_me” file in the FC 44 directory carefully. S FC 45: S7 function for ASM 452/454/473/475 S FC 46 for ASM 452 (filehandler mode). The block can be used on the S7-300 and S7-400. S FB 246 for ASM 452 (filehandler mode). The block can be used on the S5-115U with IM 308-C. S Function FC 47 for ASM 470 S FB 47 contains a function block for the SIMATIC S5-115U to 155U. It permits the ASM 470 to be used in a SIMATIC S5 environment with an ET 200M. S FC 56 for ASM 452, ASM 473, ASM 475 in filehandler mode. FC 56 has the same functions as FC 46, but offers a new, trend-setting interface to the application. S Loading program for ES 030 and a master device file for connection of the ES 030 to PROFIBUS DP. S Test and demonstrator programs for presenting the functions (e.g., “read from MDS”, “write to MDS” and so on) on a PC (e.g., with DOS or Windows). MOBY modules ASM 424 or SIM 41 are connected by a serial interface cable to the PC (i.e., COM1 or COM2). S Brief explanations of the individual directories in German or English. Cf. “les_mich.txt” or “read_me.txt”. S 3964R driver for DOS, Windows 95 and Windows NT S Current status of the MOBY documentation in PDF format S Tools: Includes useful programs for MOBY configuration S S7_OM: Installation program and Object Manager for interface modules ASM 470, ASM 475 and ASM 473 Sample projects with the appropriate FCs are not installed here. They are located in the respective FC directories. 7-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Accessories User prompting The “Software MOBY” CD offers user-friendly prompting based on HTML. When Start.exe is called, a screen appears with the following main items in the upper menu bar: S FC für S7 S FB für S5 S PC Support S Doku S Tools S Demo S News Note On Software MOBY or licensing When an interface module or SIM is purchased, no software or documentation is supplied. The “Software MOBY” CD-ROM must be ordered separately. It contains all available FBs/FCs for the SIMATIC, C-libraries for Windows 98/NT, demo programs and so on. In addition, the CD-ROM contains the complete MOBY documentation (in German, English and French) in PDF format. When an interface module or SIM is purchased, the percentile price of utilization of the software incl. documentation on the “Software MOBY” CD-ROM is included. The purchaser obtains the right to make copies (copy license) as needed by the customer-specific application or development for the system. In addition, the enclosed contract applies to the use of software products against one-time payment. Ordering data Table 7-1 Ordering data for MOBY software Order No. MOBY software MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6GT2 080-2AA10 7-3 Accessories 7.2 MOBY Wide-Range Power Supply Description The MOBY wide-range power pack is a compact, primary-pulsed power supply. It is designed for use on single-phase, alternating current networks with two DC outputs (socket connector, parallel circuited). Its robust construction features an aluminum housing which gives the finetuned system physical strength while protecting it from electromagnetic interference and providing it with optimal heat dissipation. A built-in current limitation circuit protects the primary-pulsed power supply against overload and ensures continuous short circuit resistance. The integrated overvoltage protection (SIOV) which is standard protects the connected electronics from excessively high voltage. Figure 7-1 Ordering data Table 7-2 MOBY wide-range power pack Ordering data of the MOBY wide-range power pack Order No. Technical data MOBY wide-range power pack, 100 to 230 V AC/24 V DC/2.2 A; incl. counterplug for the output voltage 6GT2 494-0AA00 24 V stub line for ASM 424, ASM 454; length: 5 m 6GT2 491-1HH50 Table 7-3 Technical data of MOBY wide-range power pack ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ Input Input voltage Nominal value Range Frequency Input current Efficiency Power connection Power failure backup Undervoltage switchoff Overvoltage protection 7-4 100 to 230 V AC 90 to 253 V AC 50/60 Hz 0.85 to 0.45 A w 80% at full load 2 m power line with protective contact connector w 10 msec Yes SIOV MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Accessories Table 7-3 Technical data of MOBY wide-range power pack Output Nominal output voltage Nominal output current Residual ripple Socket contacts 24 V DC 2.2 A 20 mVss Up to 160 kHz 50 mVss Greater than 160 kHz NTC Yes Startup current limitation Continuous short circuit protection Ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation -20_C to +40_htC (max. of +60_ C; see notes on safety) -40_ C to +80_ C Convection During transportation and storage Cooling General specifications Dimensions of power supply incl. mounting plate (L x W x H) in mm Weight Color Mounting 205 x 80 x 60 (without connection plug) Approx. 1000 g Anthracite 4 M5 screws Electromagnetic compatibility Interference emission (EN 50 081-1) Interference immunity (EN 50 082-2) Class B in acc. w. EN 55 022 EN 61 000-4-2 Safety Certifications Electrical safety check CE, GS EN 60 950/VDE 0805 and VDE 106 (part 1) 4 kV AC I, in acc. w. EN 60 950 (VDE 0805) IP 65, in acc. w. EN 60 529 (only when connected) Galvanic isolation, primary/secondary Protection class Protection rating Connector assignment 24 V output Output 1 and 2: Socket 1: Ground (0 V) 3 4 2 1 Socket 2: +24 V DC Socket 3: +24 V DC Socket 4: Ground (0 V) Figure 7-2 Connection assignment of 24 V output MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 7-5 Accessories Dimensions (in mm) 65 7.5 80 3 57 205 176 7.5 5 5 190 Figure 7-3 Dimensions of MOBY wide-range power pack Notes on safety ! 7-6 Caution Do not open the devices or modify them. Non-adherence will invalidate CE certification and the manufacturer’s warranty. When installing the power pack, adhere to the applicable DIN/VDE regulations of your country.The application area of the power pack is limited to “information technology of electrical office equipment” as stated in the standard EN 60 950/VDE 0805. Devices may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purposes of the safety notes on this product, qualified personnel are those persons who are authorized to commission, ground and tag devices, systems and electrical circuits in accordance with safety standards. The device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and technical description and only in connection with devices and components recommended by Siemens. If devices and components of other manufacturers are used, they must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Correct operation of the product includes proper storage, setup and mounting, and careful operator control and maintenance. When installing, make sure that the power outlet socket can be easily accessed. During operation, the housing may heat up to +40° C. This is no cause for concern. However, at an ambient temperature of more than +40° C, be sure to cover the power pack (power pack must still receive sufficient ventilation) so that people cannot touch the hot housing. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Accessories 7.3 MOBY STG I Hand-Held Terminal Application areas The STG I adds to the MOBY I identification system a powerful mobile hand-held terminal for applications in the areas of logistics, distribution and service. The service and test device (STG) is an indispensable aid for commissioning and testing. All MOBY I data memories can be read and writeaccessed inductively. The STG I replaces the familiar STG 4F hand-held terminal which is now only available as a replacement part. Figure 7-4 MOBY STG I hand-held terminal Setup and function The STG I mobile hand-held terminal consists of a basic device (PSION Workabout mx) and a plug-in compact read/write head. It has a housing which is protected against splashed water (IP54), an LCD monitor screen with 240 x 100 pixels, an alphanumeric keyboard and various interfaces (for EEPROM card, charging battery, RS 232/TTL for MOBY I read head, battery charging interface including RS 232 for the PC coupling, and so on). MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 7-7 Accessories The included MOBY software (memory card) provides service and test functions for reading, writing, etc. of all MOBY I data memories. S Read data from the data memory S Write data to the data memory S Delete entire data memory (write with filler value) S Present and edit the data in hexadecimal or ASCII format S Store read data in a file S Enable/disable password protection for all write functions S Choice of English or German as menu language Using the optional C library as a basis, it is very easy to program your own applications including a customized user interface for reading and writing data memories. Various development tools are available for the PC, and a large selection of accessories is available directly from PSION. New applications are opened up in the area of logistics and distribution (e.g., goods commissioning data can be recorded offline with the hand-held terminal or processed and forwarded to the PC/computer later). Filehandler functions With MOBY I, the “FILEHANDLER” program can be called on the STG I. This provides you with very convenient functions for handling your data. S Format the MDS S Set up files on the MDS S Write files on the MDS and the hand-held terminal S Read files on the MDS and the hand-held terminal S Read and display the directory of the MDS or hand-held terminal S Delete files from the MDS and the hand-held terminal Optional components See http://www.psion.com/industrial/ on the Internet. S 3link adapter cable to the PC for easy exchange of data between PC and PSION Workabout mx S PSION Workabout mx basic device with large function keys and numeric keyboard S Additional memory card with up to 8 Mbytes of memory S Docking station including high-speed charging device and software for convenient data exchange between PSION Workabout mx and PC 7-8 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Accessories System prerequisites for customer-specific applications The following prerequisites must be met when the library for SIBO ‘C’ (SIBO ‘C’ is the C developmental environment for the PSION Workabout) is used. S PC The C development package for the PSION Workabout must be installed on the PC. This development package is available directly from PSION. See: http://www.psion.com/industrial/. S Hand-held The PSION Workabout with wall bracket and power pack. Use of the STG I MOBY hand-held terminal is recommended. S PC cable You will need a 3link adapter cable from PSION for the connection to the PC. See: http://www.psion.com/industrial/. The cable is only required if not already included with the C development package. S C library The following files are required for MOBY programming. terminal – Normal addressing MOBY_I.H MOBY_STG.LIB – Filehandler FH_CMD.H FH_STG.LIB FH_STRUC.H FHDEF.H FHERR.H FHEXTERN.H These are supplied by Siemens with the MOBY SIBO ‘C’ library. Note In principle, applications can also be developed in the Basic programming language OVAL. However, the MOBY library cannot be used. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 7-9 Accessories Hardware The following figure shows the primary hardware interfaces which you can use to write your own applications. TTL interface for use of a MOBY read head RS 232 interface (e.g. connection of a MOBY I ASM, RS 232) Graphical LCD screen Control keys: Contrast; display illumination; on/off; and cursor keys Green LED (lights up when the battery is being charged) Additional Flash memory cards for storing large amounts of data Numeric input block with Enter key ASCII keyboard, shift and special function keys (Ctrl, ) LIF interface for connection of PC, printer, charging function, and so on Figure 7-5 Hardware of the MOBY STG I hand-held terminal If you are using another type of PSION Workabout, other interfaces are also available. A few examples are listed below. S Infrared interface S Numeric keyboard and function keys 7-10 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Accessories Ordering data Table 7-4 Ordering data of the STG I hand-held terminal Order No. Mobile STG I hand-held terminal Basic device (PSION Workaboutmx) with MOBY I read/write head, battery, standard software including STG functionality and filehandler software on EEPROM card, user’s guide, without charging station 6GT2 003-0CA00 Charging station for a mobile hand-held terminal with 230 V AC plug connector power pack 6GT2 303-1DA00 Accessories: MOBY I read/write head, 1.81 MHz + 134 KHz without software and without description 6GT2 003-1CA00 Memory card with STG software and filehandler software for MOBY D/E/F/I/U, including user’s guide 6GT2 303-1CA00 C library for MOBY D/E/F/I/U for development of customer-specific screen dialogs, without development tools, including description Technical data 6GT2 381-1AB00 Extra battery 6GT2 094-0AB00 or 2 AA batteries (NiCd, Ni-MH, alkali) Additional PSION components (e.g., 3link cable and C developmental user interface) Obtain from local dealer or PSION. (http://www.psion.com/ industrial/) Table 7-5 Technical data of the STG I hand-held terminal Hardware Processor NEC V30mx 27.68 MHz (80C86-compatible) RAM memory 2 Mbytes of which approx. 1.8 Mbytes can be used as desired ROM memory 2 Mbytes for operating system User program 1 Mbyte (with MOBY service and test program) Monitor screen Graphic LCD monitor screen with 240 x 100 pixels, gray-stage scale, backlighting can be turned on Keyboard Alphanumeric with 57 keys Sound Piezo signal encoder Power supply NiCd battery pack with 2 type-AA cells (850 mAh) High-speed chargeable, automatic switch-off Operation time 20 hours (read head inactive, display not lighted) 4.5 hours (read head active, display not lighted) 10 hours (read head inactive, display lighted) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 7-11 Accessories Table 7-5 Technical data of the STG I hand-held terminal Interfaces LIF interface (LIF = Low Insertion Force) for battery charging and communication with PC and printer (3link cable not included) RS 232 and TTL interface for connection of a MOBY read head Security Locking mechanism for battery and program memory Software Operating system EPOC/16 multitasking, graphics support, GUI interface, Interpreter similar to MS-DOS File management MS-DOS-compatible Integrated software MOBY service and test program, spread sheet calculation, data base, pocket calculator, communication MOBY STG program Read, write, delete MDS, read MDS-ID. Store MDS data and charge. Menus in German or English. Entry and presentation of data in ASCII or HEX. MOBY filehandler program Read, write, set up, delete files of the MDS and hand-held terminal; display directory; format, lock MDS, status; display for directory and editor Technical Data Complete Device (Incl. Batteries) Read head Dimensions Weight 260 x 90 x 35 [mm] Approx. 440 g 90 x 64 x 35 [mm] Approx. 110 g Temperature During operation –20° C to +60° C During transportation and storage –25° C to +80° C (without battery) Relative humidity 0% to 90%, no condensation Type of protection IP54 (protected against splashed water) Shock resistance Max. fall onto concrete: 1 m EMC EN 55022; FCC Part 15 Low Power Transmitter Electrostatic, RF, EFT IEC 801-2; IEC 801-3; IEC 801-4 Certifications ETS 300 330 reg. no. TTJ-P-G 128/96 FCC ID: KR5 MIS–I RF Read/Write Head MOBY I Maximum read/ write i distances di 7-12 134 kHz energy/1.81 MHz data MDS Type Distance in mm 401/402 403 404/514 506 439E 6 8 20 12 12 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Accessories FCC information Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY I STG I THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES: OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 7-13 Accessories 7.4 Acquisition Station ES 030-K Application area Acquisition station ES 030-K is a microprocessor-controlled terminal for general-purpose use in all sectors of industry. It offers several interfaces. This station is particularly suitable for use with the MOBY I and MOBY L identification systems and with barcodes to lessen the load of higher-level host systems. Its modular design permits configuration of functions and design to meet the requirements of individual applications. Features/layout S Can be programmed as desired with PG and PC in programming language STEP5 S Dialog or process-oriented with keys which can be assigned as desired S Sturdy construction (IP54) for industrial environments (e.g., for control even when operator is wearing protective gloves) S Flexible hardware layout S Serial interfaces (i.e., TTY, RS 485, (RS 422), and V.24) for connection to higher-level computers, PLCs or printer with Lauf, 3964R, SINEC L1 and PROFIBUS DP procedures S Additional interfaces for MOBY I and MOBY L identification systems, barcode wands, scanners and swipe readers S Integrated function blocks for frequently used functions S With master/slave function for SINEC L1 7-14 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Plug connector 3 Plug connector 2 PLUG-IN OPTION 1 Serial expansion interface TTY und V.242 8 digital inputs-/ 8 digital outputs 16 digital inputs2 PLUG_IN OPTION 1 Plug connector 1 OPTION Plug connector 4 OPTION OPTION Accessories LCD display 2 x 24 characters LCD display 4 x 20 characters Keyboard with 29 lighted keys key-operated switch Sealed keyboard with 30 keys, 30 LEDs key-operated switch Clock chip MOBY I SLG Interface MOBY I filehandler SLG Interface MOBY L SLG Interface Barcode wand PROFIBUS DP Interface MOBY I SLG Interface MOBY I filehandler SLG Interface MOBY L SLG Interface Serial Interface TTY and X.27 8 digital inputs/ 8 digital outputs2 PROFIBUS DP Interface Figure 7-6 1 2 Configurator of ES 030-K Each plug-in option is a hardware module requiring one slot on the ES 030-K. The options “serial expansion interface” and “16 digital inputs” can also be led out on plug connector 2 as a special version. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 7-15 Accessories Ordering data Table 7-6 Ordering data for ES 030-K Acquisition station ES 030-K with serial interface (TTY and X.27) on plug connector 1 8 DI + 8 DO on plug connector 2 Display Without display LCD, 2 x 24 characters LDC, 4 x 20 characters 6AW5 451- J J J J 3 0 1 2 Plug connector 3 Not used MOBY I, MOBY E interface 8 DI + 8 DO 16 DI MOBY I filehandler MOBY L interface PROFIBUS DP interface1 Serial interface (TTY, V.24) A C D E F L P S Plug connector 4 Not used Barcode (incl. wand) MOBY I, MOBY E interface MOBY I filehandler MOBY L interface Barcode (without wand) PROFIBUS DP interface1 A B C F L N P Keyboard No Keyboard Sealed Keyboard, 30 keys. 30 LEDs Keyboard with 29 illuminated buttons 6AW5 451-8AU Charging kit for ES 030 1 7-16 0 2 3 Alternate: Plug 4 recommended MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Accessories Technical data Table 7-7 Technical data of ES 030-K Microprocessor Clock pulse frequency Storage capacity (basic model) 80C32 14.7 MHz EEPROM 32 Kbytes = 16 K instruction RAM 128 Kbytes, battery-buffered for approx. 8 years (DB1-DB120) Command set (STEP5) Almost same as SIMATIC 100U (e.g., logical link operations, storage operations, load and transfer operations, time and counting operations, comparison operations, and processing operations) Display 2 x 24-character LCD or 4 x 20-character LCD Digital inputs/outputs Always included 8 DI and 8 DO, floating Optional module 8 DI and 8 DO, floating Optional module 16 DI, floating S Digital input Logical “0”: -2 to +2 V Logical “1”: 16 to 33 V (Ri = approx. 5 kΩ) Common ground of all DI S Digital output Logical “1”: +24 V I = 100 mA, I = 50 mA Short-circuit proof Common +24 V of all DO Serial interface (plug connector 1) TTY or RS 485 Procedure 3964R, Lauf, SINEC L1 Speed 150 to 19200 baud Serial interface Interface module (plug connector 3) 20 mA single current Active/passive or V.24 Procedure: Lauf or 3964R Fieldbus PROFIBUS DP (slave) certified in acc. w. part III of DIN 19245 Baud rate 9.6 kbaud to 1.5 Mbaud Connection 9-pin sub D plug connector on plug connector 4 (optionally on plug connector 3) Connectable barcode interface (max. of 2) Reading wand, swipe reader, hand-held laser scanner MOBY I Connectable SLGs (max. of 2) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 SLG 40/SLG 40-S SLG 41/SLG 41-S/SLG 41C SLG 42 SLG 43 SLG 44 7-17 Accessories Table 7-7 Technical data of ES 030-K MOBY L Connectable SLGs (max. of 2) SLG 52 Connection to SIMATIC S5 RS 485, V.24, TTY or SINEC L1 Keyboard Push-button keyboard 29 illuminated push-buttons 1 key-operated switch Sealed keyboard 30 keys, 30 LEDs 1 key-operated switch Power connection, normal 230 V AC, +10%; 48 to 62 Hz Grounding-type plug connector in acc. w. DIN 49441 Optional 24 V DC (20 to 30 V) Current consumption Approx. 20 VA RAM/clock backup Backup battery for approx. 8 years Interference suppression Interference class B in acc. w. VDE 0871 Protection rating IP54 Ambient temperature 7-18 Operation 0° to +40° C Transportation and storage –40° to +70° C Relative humidity Up to 95% Housing Die-cast zinc Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 180 x 280 x 95 Weight (approx.) 5 kg Silicone free Yes MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Accessories ES 030-K ES 030-K Basic model with 8 DI/DO and serial interface, without display and without keyboard (e.g., to address a switch) Basic model with 8 DI/DO and serial interface, with LCD indication and sealed keyboard and MOBY I or MOBY L for quality data Serial interface/RS 422 Serial interface TTY MDS SIMATIC S5/CP 544 MDS A0.1 MDS SLG SLG SLG ES 030-K ES 303-K (only slave) SIMATIC S5/S7 PC (master) PLC (master) D Ex: station 11 P PROFIBUS DP Serial connection for barcode scanner L1 Station 120 DI/DO Type 2 Station 14 Serial connection for barcode scanner Manual input Type 3 L1 L1 DI/DO Manual input ES 030-K ES 030-K Basic model with 8 DI/DO and serial interface, with LCD indication and push-buttons or sealed keyboard Basic model with serial interface (L1), with LCD, sealed keyboard, barcode wand L1 MOBY I interface Serial interface PC/PLC A0.1 E0.0 MDS TTY/RS485 A0.0 1234567 SLG Barcode Figure 7-7 Sample configuration of ES 030-K MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 7-19 Accessories 7-20 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Documentation A Starting 10.01.2004, the technical documentation of MOBY is only available electronically on the “Software MOBY” CD with the order number 6GT2 080-2AA10. Technical descriptions S Description ASM 400/401 (German/English) S Description ASM 410 (German/English) S Description ASM 450/FC 44 (German/English/French) S Description FC 45 (German/English/French) S Description ASM 451/FC 46 (German/English) S Description FC 56 (German/English) S Description FB 246 (German) S Description ASM 470/FC 47 for SIMATIC S7 (German/English) S Description ASM470/FB 47 for SIMATIC S5 (German/English) S Description SIM (for SIM 4x) (German/English) S Description FB 230 (German/English) S Description FB 240 (German/English) S Description FB 250 for ASM 400/401 (German/English) S Description 3964 R for Win 95/NT (German/English) S Description T3964R for DOS (German/English) S Description MOBY API (German/English) S Description MDS 439 E (German/English) Operator control guides S Operator control guide for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/ German) (also included with STG I) S Programming instructions for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/ German) Manuals S Configuration manual SLG 44/MDS 507/MDS 407 E (German/English) S Equipment manual for ES 030-K (German/English) MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 A-1 Documentation A-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 B Error Messages This appendix contains a list of MOBY I error messages. These messages are divided into three groups. B.1 Error numbers 01 hex to 1F hex are described in the first section. These messages are the same for all interfaces which use direct MDS addressing. B.2 Some function blocks (e.g., FB 250, FB 240, FC 45 and FC 47) provide additional messages on the status of the hardware. These special messages are described in this section. B.3 All filehandler messages are grouped in the third section. These messages apply to ASM 401 with FB 230 as well as ASM 452, ASM 473 and ASM 475 with FC 46, FC 56. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 B-1 Error Messages B.1 General Errors The following error codes can occur during MOBY I operation. They are transferred in the status byte during telegram communication or via the red LED on the front plate. On most ASM modules, this LED always indicates the last error even when this error has already been corrected. On ASM 450, ASM 452, the error codes can also be optionally reported via PROFIBUS as device-related diagnoses. FC 45 images this error code with the “error_MOBY” variable. B-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Error Messages Table B-1 General errors Error Code in Hex LED Cause/Remedy 00 00 No error. Result is okay. – 01 See error code 0F. 01 02 Presence error. MDS has moved out of the transmission window of the SLG. The MOBY command could only be executed partially. Read command: No data are supplied to the computer. Write command: The data memory which just left the field contains an incomplete data record. SIN1 0000 0003 –> Sa (operating distance from SLG to MDS) not adhered to –> Configuration error: Data block to be processed is too large (during dynamic operation). The next command (READ, WRITE or NEXT) is automatically related to the next MDS. Remark: The red error LED on the front plate shows error code 02. 02 02 Presence error 0005 –> A mobile data memory has passed by the SLG and was not processed with a command or concluded with the NEXT command. –> An INIT command was aborted with RESET. This error message cannot be transferred until the next command (read, write, status, RESET, DI/DO or NEXT). The command is not executed but causes this error message. The ASM executes the next command correctly again. Error 02 is reported immediately via external diagnosis. Remark: The red error LED does not distinguish between errors 01 and 02. See error code 01. 03 03 Error in the connection to the SLG 0040 –> –> –> –> Supply voltage of ASM < 20 V or not connected 24 V voltage has voltage drops. Fuse on ASM has triggered. Check wiring. Cable between ASM and SLG is wired incorrectly or a cable break has occurred. –> Hardware defect (ASM or SLG) –> Another SLG in the vicinity is active. –> Interference on SLG cable or bus cable 04 04 Error in memory of the MDS 0041 The data memory has never been write-accessed or has lost its contents due to a battery failure. –> –> –> –> –> 05 05 Initialize data memory with STG. With ASM: Call initialization command. Check battery of MDS or replace MDS (battery bit). Data memory is defective. Initialization was performed with wrong memory size. Unknown command code in byte 2 of the telegram MDS reports address error. Check telegram. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 0002/ 0004 B-3 Error Messages Table B-1 General errors Error Code in Hex LED 06 06 Cause/Remedy Field interference on SLG SIN1 0044 The SLG is receiving interference pulses from its surroundings. –> External interference field. The interference field can be located with the inductive field indicator of the STG: –> The distance between two SLGs is too short and does not correspond to configuration guidelines. –> The connection cable to the SLG has malfunctioned, is too long or does not meet specifications. 07 07 Too many sending errors 0045 The MDS could not receive the command or the write data from the SLG correctly even after several attempts. –> The MDS is located in the boundary area of the transmission window. –> The data transmission to the MDS is being affected by external interference. 08 08 CRC sending error 0044 – The monitoring circuit has detected an error during sending. –> Cause same as error 06 – The MDS reports CRC errors very frequently. –> The MDS is located in the boundary area of the SLG. –> The MDS and/or the SLG have a hardware defect. 09 09 Only for initialization. CRC error during acknowledgment receipt from MDS – –> Cause same as error 06 0A 10 Only for initialization. MDS cannot execute INIT command. – –> MDS is defective. 0B 11 Only for initialization. Timeout while initializing the MDS – –> MDS is located exactly on the boundary of the transmission window. –> The MDS is using too much current (i.e., defective). –> Only for MDS 507. MDS 507 operation was not enabled with the “RESET with parameter transfer” command. 0C 12 Memory of the MDS can no longer be written. 0046 –> Memory of MDS is defective. –> EEPROM–type MDS was write-accessed too often and has reached the end of its life. –> An incorrect end address was parameterized for the INIT command. 0D 13 Address error (address area exceeded) –> Specified address does not exist on the MDS. –> Check and correct the command for telegram layout. –> The status byte is not 00 for the command. 0E 14 ECC error The data could not be read from the MDS. 0002/ 0004 0047 –> MDS data have been lost (i.e., MDS defective). –> The MDS was not initialized with the ECC driver. –> Initialize MDS. –> MDS with EEPROM has reached the end of its life. The data have been lost. –> Replace MDS. –> The MDS moved out of the field during a write-access. –> The MDS is not positioned correctly. –> Command to ASM was issued incorrectly by the user. B-4 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Error Messages Table B-1 General errors Error Code in Hex LED 0F 01 Cause/Remedy SIN1 Startup message The ASM always sends this message after every startup. A startup is considered performed after operational voltage is applied, after the front switch is activated, after a reset via plug connector X1 or after a bus error. The startup message is retained until the user issues a RESET command to the ASM. This enables the user to recognize when voltage returns to the ASM (i.e., readiness for operation). 10 16 NEXT command is not possible or is not permitted. 1043 –> ASM is operating without the presence check. –> ASM has already received a NEXT command. 11 17 Short circuit or overload of the 24 V outputs Next command must be a RESET command. –> The affected output is switched off. –> All 24 V outputs are switched off when a total overload occurs. –> A reset can only be performed by turning the supply voltage off and on again. 12 18 Internal ASM communication error The connection to the MOBY processor has malfunctioned. Next command must be a RESET command. –> Hardware of ASM is defective. –> EMC interference 14 20 Internal ASM error Stack overflow. Next command must be a RESET command. –> Turn 24 V supply off and on again. 15 21 Erroneous operational parameterization –> Check switch on ASM. 16 22 The command cannot be executed with the current bus configuration. –> Input or output areas are too small for the telegram length used. –> Read or write command with excessive length used –> Adjust bus configuration of the master module. 17 23 Handshake error Next command must be a RESET command. –> The user set an incorrect bit in the command byte of the telegram during the handshake procedure. –> Check user program and correct. 18 24 Only RESET command permitted –> An error has occurred which must be acknowledged with a RESET command. Cause may be a brief short circuit on PROFIBUS. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 B-5 Error Messages Table B-1 General errors Error Code in Hex LED 19 25 Cause/Remedy Previous command is active. SIN1 0042 A new command was issued to the ASM although the last command is still active. –> An active command can only be terminated with a RESET command. –> The new command is concluded with error 19 hex. The old command is executed by the ASM, and the finished message is reported after completion. 1A 26 PROFIBUS DP error has occurred. –> Bus connection has been interrupted (e.g., wire break or plug pulled). –> Master no longer addresses the ASM. –> The error is reported as soon as the bus connection is restored again. 1E 30 – The telegram does not have the correct format. – AB byte does not correspond to the user data length. –> Check and correct the telegrams in the user program. – 1F 31 Communication with the MDS was terminated with a RESET. This error can only be reported back with a RESET command. – 20 (binary xx1x xxxx) 32 Not an error message 40 (binary x1xx xxxx) 64 80 (binary 1xxx xxxx) 128 0052 2 Only occurs when working with the ECC driver enabled. It indicates that the driver recognized and corrected a 1-bit error. The read/write data are okay. 0051 2 Not an error message This bit is normally always set. It is reserved for the status indication of a 2nd battery on the MDS. 0050 2 Not an error message Battery voltage of the MDS has fallen below the threshold value. Immediate replacement of the MDS is recommended. This status bit is always set for EEPROM-type MDSs. When SINUMERIK is involved, the battery message is provided in IDENTIFICATION without the “F“ ID. To detect poor battery stats, the “fnr” field can be evaluated at one location for the entire system. 1 2 SIN = Equivalent error number for SIM in SINUMERIK operating mode When several states occur at the same time, the following sequence applies: 0052, 0050 and 0051. B-6 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Error Messages B.2 ASM-Related Errors B.2.1 ASM 400 with FB 250 The messages shown in table B-2 are indicated in data word 5 of FBDB. Table B-2 Error messags of FB 250 Error Message Bit 1 = “1”: Synchronization error Cause/Remedy S FB 250 has received the result for a command which is not located in ZUWDB (i.e., not at this location). The pointer (ZUW) to ZUWDB may have been changed while a command was active. S EMC effects have caused the ASM to execute another command than programmed by the user. –> Check the entire SIMATIC system. Check the grounding concept. Bit 2 = “1”: FB 250 is synchronized (SYNCH) General communication capability with a channel module of the ASM 400 module. This bit is set after a positive check of the FB parameterization. This takes place during the 1st RESET immediately after bootstrap loading of the programs and data blocks. When a RESET command does not function, the bit is not set or reset. ASM 400 module cannot be addressed by the FB. S Wrong address set on the ASM 400 S ASM 400 is defective. –> A RESET must always be performed after the sync bit is reset. Bit 4 = “1”: Parameterization error S The “ADR” parameter does not contain the correct values. S The “KAN” parameter is specified incorrectly. Permitted values are 1 or 2. S The “TYP” parameter was specified incorrectly. Permitted values are 0, 1, 3, 5, and 6. S The “ANW” parameter is not “0” or “1”. S The command is not permitted in ZUWDB. Bit 5 = “1”: ASM error S The exact ASM error is located in bits 8 to 15 of ANZ. If bits 8 to 15 = 0: S The FB did not receive an acknowledgment from the ASM in time after command transfer. S FB 250 was not called by the user within 4 seconds after command start (no cyclic FB call). S The user changed data in the FBDB (DW 0 to DW 24) – particularly DW 0/1. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 B-7 Error Messages Table B-2 Error messags of FB 250 Error Message Cause/Remedy Bit 6 = “1”: Loop counter monitor in FB 250 has been triggered. Time error S The command data could not be or could not be completely transferred to the ASM 400. S The ASM 400 cannot be addressed by the FB. The “ADR” parameter may not correspond to switch setting S3 on the ASM 400. S Length = 0 was transferred with a write command. S The “AG” parameter is set incorrectly. S The user has changed data in FBDB (particularly DW 0/1). –> Check ASM 400 hardware, addressing parameterization and user program. Bit 7 = “1”: The command to the ASM 400 was repeated. Repetition error S Error in BEST = 0 The command was not concluded correctly after command repetition (not an error). S Error in BEST = 1 Communication malfunction between ASM and FB 250. Despite command repetition, the command still could not be executed correctly. When the repetition bit is set sporadically, all hardware must be checked. Special attention should be paid to the grounding concept. Bits 8 to 12 Error message as shown in table B-1 Bit 13 = “1” ECC offset was performed. Bit 14 = “1” Dialog battery of MDS 507 has dropped below threshold value. Bit 15 = “1” RAM battery has dropped below threshold value. B-8 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Error Messages B.2.2 ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47 The indication word for FC 47 is DBB 6/7. The indication word for FB 47 is DW 3. S MOBY errors are indicated in DBB 6 or DL 3. Cf. table B-1. S Internal errors of the function block are indicated in DBB 7 or DR 3. Cf. table B-3. The red LED does not flash for these error messages from FB 47/FC 47. The contents of the byte are specified in hexadecimal format (i.e., HEX) and as fixed point numbers (i.e., DEC). Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 ANZ (RightHand Byte) Description 02 HEX/ Illegal command code or command parameter was entered. 02 DEC S Parameterize data words in BEDB correctly in accordance with the command description. 06 HEX/ The command code and the received acknowledgment code are not identical. 06 DEC S ASM 470 not parameterized correctly S Internal processing error S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. 07 HEX/ Synchronization error during execution of FB 47/FC 47 07 DEC S Internal processing error S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. 08 HEX/ 08 DEC The parameterized user data length of the read/write command and the user data length received in the acknowledgment are not identical. 09 HEX/ The received or written user data are too long. 09 DEC S ASM 470 not parameterized correctly S Read command: The length specified for the data to be read is too long. Maximum of 12 bytes is S ASM 470 not parameterized correctly S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. permitted. 10 HEX/ Read or written user data length too short. User data length is 0 bytes. 10 DEC S Internal processing error S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. 17 HEX/ The formal operands of FB 47/FC 47 were parameterized incorrectly. 17 DEC S Parameterize FB 47/FC 47 correctly. S Then start RESET command. 19 HEX/ FB 47/FC 47 reports that only a RESET command is permitted as the next command. 19 DEC S No RESET was performed after a startup message of the ASM 470. S No RESET was performed after an error message after which a RESET must be the next command. S Start RESET command. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 B-9 Error Messages Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 ANZ (RightHand Byte) Description 20 HEX/ Synchronization error between ASM 470 and FB 47/FC 47 20 DEC S The handshake of the command and acknowledgment telegrams is out of step. There may be a contact problem or the supply voltage may be unstable. S BEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. S Start RESET command. 21 HEX/ ASM 470 has performed a startup. 21 DEC S S S S S 1B HEX/ 27 DEC1 There may be a problem with the plug-in contact of the ASM 470 in the S7-300. Supply voltage of the ASM 470 is unstable. Interference pulse DEDB is being overwritten by other program segments. Start RESET command. S The data field (i.e., number of user data bytes) between DAT-Z and the end of DATDB is less than the length given in the write command (DR 4 in BEDB). Exception: DATDB consists of 256 data words (DW 0 to DW 255). S DAT-Z must be adjusted to the user data length. Make DAT-Z smaller. S Reduce length of read/write data. S Start RESET command. 1 Can only occur with FB 47 B-10 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Error Messages B.2.3 ASM 450 with FB 240 The error indications (ANZ) of FB 240 are located in data word DW 2 of the BEDB. S The MOBY errors listed in table B-1 are located in the left-hand byte of the data word (DL 2). S Internal FB errors are located in the right-hand byte of the data word (DR 2). The red LED does not flash for these FB 240 error messages. The contents of the byte are specified in binary format, in hexadecimal format (H) and as fixed point numbers (D). Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240 ANZ (RightHand Byte) Description 00000010 (02H/02D) Illegal command code or command parameter was entered. 00000110 (06H/06D) The command code and the received acknowledgment code are not identical. 00000111 (07H/07D) The received acknowledgment is too long. 00001000 (08H/08D) The parameterized length of the user data of the read/write command and the user data length received in the acknowledgment are not identical. S Parameterize data words in BEDB correctly as specified in the command description. S Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small. S Parameterize master module correctly. S Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small (check GSD file). S Read command: The length of the data to be read is too long. S Parameterize master module correctly. S Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small. S Parameterize master module correctly. 00001001 (09H/09D) The length of the received user data is too long. 00010001 (11H/17D) The formal operands of FB 240 were parameterized incorrectly or the parameterization in the EPROM of IM 308-B is wrong. S Input and output area of the ASM 450 is too small (check GSD file). S Read command: The length of the data to be read is too long. S Parameterize master module correctly. S Parameterize FB 240 correctly. S Parameterize master module correctly. Check the “ADR” parameter in particular. S Then start RESET command. 00010011 (13H/19D) FB 240 reports that only a RESET is permitted as the next command. S No RESET was performed after a startup message of the ASM 450. S No RESET was performed after an error message which requires a RESET as the next command. S Start RESET command. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 B-11 Error Messages Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240 ANZ (RightHand Byte) 00010100 (14H/20D) Description Synchronization error between ASM 450 and FB 240 S The handshake of the command and acknowledgment telegrams is out of step. There may be a contact problem or the supply voltage may be unstable. S Start RESET command. 00010101 (15H/21D) B-12 The ASM 450 has performed a startup or a PROFIBUS DP bus error has occurred. S S S S S Possible problem with the ASM 450’s plug-in contacts in the module rack Supply voltage of the ASM 450 is unstable. Interference pulse on the reset input of base connector X1 PROFIBUS DP error occurred (e.g., bus connection interrupted) Start RESET command. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Error Messages B.2.4 Error Indication with FC 45 FC 45 shows the error codes in 3 variables. Table B-5 S error_MOBY: MOBY error in acc. w. table B-1 S error_FC: Errors generated by FC 45 due to wrong parameterization (cf. table B-5) S error_BUS: Errors reported by system functions SFC 58/59 (cf. table B-6) Error variable error_FC Description error_FC (B#8#..) 00 No error. Standard value if everything’s okay. 01 SIMATIC does not have Params_DB. 02 Params_DB is too small. ⇒ UDT 10/11 was not used for the definition. ⇒ Params_DB must be 300 bytes long (for each channel). ⇒ Check Params_DB and Params_ADDR for correctness. 03 SIMATIC does not have the DB after the “command_DB_number” pointer. 04 The “command_DB” on SIMATIC is too small. ⇒ UDT 20/21 was not used for the command definition. ⇒ The last command in “command_DB” is a chained command. Reset the chaining bit. 05 Invalid command type 06 The acknowledgment received is not the acknowledgment expected. The parameters of command and acknowledgment telegram do not match (command, length, address_MDS). ⇒ The user changed the “command_DB_number/command_DB_address” pointer while the command was being processed. ⇒ The user changed the command parameters in data block MOBY CMD (UDT 20) while the command was being processed. 07 The MOBY_mode parameter (defined in UDT 10) has an illegal value. 08 A bus error is reported by system functions SFC 58/59. Variable error_Bus contains more information on the error. 09 The ASM failed. ⇒ Power failure on the MOBY-ASM ⇒ PROFIBUS plug pulled or PROFIBUS cable disconnected The error is indicated when the ASM_Failure bit was set in OB 122. OB 122 is called when FC 45 is no longer able to access the cyclic word for the MOBY-ASM. 0A While the init_run command was being executed, the user started another init_run command without waiting for “ready.” ⇒ Do not set init_run cyclically. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 B-13 Error Messages Table B-5 Error variable error_FC error_FC (B#8#..) Description 0B Init_run cannot be executed. Cyclic process image to the ASM is faulty. FC 45 reports timeout of PII. (This error can be eliminated by writing #00 to address DBB 58 in UDT 10. However, in certain error situations, FC 45 won’t generate an error message and will ”hang up.”) 0C Table B-6 ⇒ ASM_address in UDT 10 is parameterized incorrectly. ASM_address may be pointing to a wrong module. ⇒ ASM hardware/firmware is faulty. Area length error. Error_BUS contains the error 8x22 or 8x23. ⇒ DAT_DB doesn’t exist or is parameterized too small. Check DAT_DB_number and DAT_DB_address in UDT 20. ⇒ Perform init_run. Error variable error_Bus Description Error Code (W#16#...) 800A ASM is not ready. Temporary message. ⇒ This message is received by the user who is not using FC 45 and who is polling the ASM noncyclically very quickly in succession. 8x7F Internal error in parameter x. Cannot be corrected by the user. 8x22 8x23 Area length error while reading a parameter Area length error while writing a parameter This error code indicates that parameter x is completely or partially outside the operand range or the length of a bit field of an ANY parameter is not divisible by 8. 8x24 8x25 Area error while reading a parameter Area error while writing a parameter This error code indicates that parameter x is located in an area which is illegal for the system function. 8x26 The parameter contains a number of a time cell which is too large. 8x27 The parameter contains a number of a counter cell which is too large. 8x28 8x29 Orientation error while reading a parameter Orientation error while writing a parameter The reference to parameter x is an operand whose bit address is not 0. 8x30 8x31 The parameter is located in the write-protected global DB. The parameter is located in the write-protected instance DB. 8x32 8x34 8x35 The parameter has a DB number which is too large. The parameter has an FC number which is too large. The parameter has an FB number which is too large. 8x3A 8x3C 8x3E The parameter has the number of a DB which is not loaded. The parameter has the number of an FC which is not loaded. The parameter has the number of an FB which is not loaded. B-14 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Error Messages Table B-6 Error variable error_Bus Error Code (W#16#...) 8x42 8x43 Description An access error occurred while the system was trying to read a parameter from the I/O area of the inputs. An access error occurred while the system was trying to write a parameter to the I/O area of the outputs. 8x44 8x45 Error during nth (n>1) read access after an error occurred Error during nth (n>1) write access after an error occurred 8090 Specified logical base address is invalid. No assignment exists in SDB1/SDB2x or it isn’t a base address. 8092 A type other than BYTE is specified in ANY reference. 8093 The area identifier contained in the configuration (SDB1, SDB2x) of the logical address is not permitted for these SFCs. Permitted: 0 = S7-400 1 = S7-300 2.7 = DP modules 80A0 Negative acknowledgment while reading from the module (module removed during the read procedure or module is defective) 80A1 Negative acknowledgment while writing to the module (module removed during the write procedure or module is defective) 80A2 DP protocol error in layer 2. Hardware may be defective. 80A3 DP protocol error in Direct-Data-Link-Mapper or User-Interface/User. Hardware may be defective. 80B0 S SFC not possible for this module type S Module doesn’t recognize the data record. S A data record number w241 is illegal. S Data records 0 and 1 are not permitted for SFC58 “WR_REC.” 80B1 The length in the RECORD parameter is wrong. 80B2 Although configured, the slot is not occupied. 80B3 Actual module type is not the module type configured in SDB1. 80C0 S RD REC: The module has the data record but no read data yet. S WR REC: ASM is not ready for new data. ⇒ Wait for the cyclic counter to be incremented. 80C1 The module has not yet processed the data of the previous write job for the same data record. 80C2 The module is currently processing the maximum number of jobs for a CPU. 80C3 Required resources (memory, etc.) not available at the moment. 80C4 Communication error S S S S S 80C5 Parity error SW-Ready not set Error in block length management Checksum error on CPU side Checksum error on module side Distributed I/O not available MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 B-15 Error Messages B.3 Filehandler Error Messages for ASM 401/452/473/475 These error messages are indicated by FB 230, FB 246, FC 46 and FC 56. Table B-7 Filehandler error messages Description ASCII Error Code A0 06 The command ID (KK) of the started command is not permitted or not defined. Specify the correct command ID. A0 11 The telegram monitoring parameters (DBN or KK) are not being sent in the correct order. Two or more telegrams are being written in the same page frame memory area. Parameterization of the FB call parameters (“SSNR” and “KAN”) must be checked for all channels. S For 1st command block: DBN (i.e., byte 8/9 in the telegram) does not have the value 0001. S For next block: DBN of the user is not in correct ascending sequence or the KK parameter (i.e., byte 4) does not correspond to the command just executed. A0 15 Check byte mode is enabled. The check byte generated by FB 230 does not correspond to the command telegram. Correction same as A0 11. A0 16 The filehandler is executing the commands of another user (e.g., the STG, can be recognized in bit 6 (“STG active/ASM test”) of BEST). Command execution is delayed until the other user finishes. Start command again if necessary. B0 01 Error in connection to the SLG S S S S Cable between ASM and SLG is incorrectly wired, or a cable break has occurred. 24 V supply voltage is not connected or has been turned off. Fuse on the ASM 401 is defective. Hardware defect: Channel module or SLG This error does not occur during the start of system commands (i.e., RESET, NEXT and ASM STATUS). B0 02 EAKO 1: S A command was started, but there is no MDS in the transmission window of the SLG. EAKO 0: S The old/current MDS has left the transmission window, and the new/next MDS has entered the transmission window. A command was started (not NEXT). This command refers to the new MDS, but the old/current MDS has not yet been concluded with NEXT. S A new MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG but leaves it again without a command being executed for this MDS (i.e., an MDS has “slipped through”). C0 02 The MDS reports a memory error. S Replace MDS if the battery monitoring bit is set S Test MDS by attempting to initialize it with the STG S Format MDS with FORMAT B-16 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Error Messages Table B-7 Filehandler error messages ASCII Error Code C0 06 Description During certain important procedures (e.g., write system area of the MDS or format MDS), the MDS may not leave the transmission window of the SLG or the command will be terminated with this error message. S Start command again. S MDS is located in the boundary area of the SLG transmission window. S EAKO = 1: MDS was not located in the transmission window of the SLG when the command was started. C0 07 S The FORMAT or TRACE command was issued with the wrong parameters. This physical ad- dress given in the command does not exist on the MDS. MDS memory is smaller than specified in the command. S READ/WRITE/UPDATE: Pointer in the FAT is faulty. It indicates a block which does not exist on the MDS. C0 08 Field interference on the SLG. The SLG is receiving interference from its surroundings. Some sources are listed below. S External field of interference. The interference field can be documented with the “inductive field indicator” of the STG. S The distance between two SLGs is too short and does not adhere to configuration guidelines. S The connection cable to the SLG has malfunctioned, is too long or does not meet specifications. C0 09 Too many sending errors have occurred. The MDS could not receive the command or the write data from the ASM correctly even after several attempts. S The MDS is located exactly in the boundary area of the transmission window. S The data transmission to the MDS is being affected by external interference. C0 10 S CRC sending error. The monitor receiving circuit has detected an error while information was being sent. Error cause same as C0 08. S The MDS reports CRC errors very frequently. The MDS is located in the boundary area, or the MDS or SLG is defective. C0 11 Same as C0 08 C0 12 The MDS is unable to perform the FORMAT command. The MDS is defective. C0 13 While being formatted, the MDS must remain in the transmission window of the SLG. Otherwise a timeout error will occur. This means: S The MDS is located exactly in the boundary area of the transmission window. S The MDS is using too much current (i.e., is defective). S The EEPROM-MDS type is parameterized incorrectly for FORMAT. C0 14 The memory of the MDS cannot be written. This means: S The MDS has a smaller memory than specified in the FORMAT command (i.e., parameterize the MDS type correctly). S The memory of the MDS is defective. S The EEPROM-type MDS has been write-accessed too often and has reached the end of its life. C0 15 Address error. The address area of the MDS was exceeded. S The MDS is not the right type. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 B-17 Error Messages Table B-7 Filehandler error messages ASCII Error Code C0 16 Description An ECC error has occurred. The data cannot be read from the MDS. S Data of the MDS have been lost (i.e., MDS is defective). S The MDS was not formatted with the ECC driver. Format the MDS again. S An EEPROM-type MDS has reached the end of its life, and the data have been lost. Replace the MDS. S The MDS moved out of the field while being write-accessed. The MDS is not positioned cor- rectly. Remember: The system area of the MDS is automatically written on every SLG station. C0 17 The filehandler is not working correctly. S Check command layout or command sequence. S The hardware of the ASM 401 (firmware) has a defect. D0 01 The filehandler will only accept a RESET command. S The filehandler has not yet been initialized with a RESET command. S This state can only be canceled with a RESET command. D0 05 D0 07 The FORMAT, CREATE, WRITE, ATTRIB, UPDATE, COVER, QUEUE-READ or QUEUE-WRITE commands were issued with illegal parameters. S S S S S S S FORMAT with illegal MDS name or MDS type CREATE with illegal file name WRITE/UPDATE with length 0 (DLNG = 0) Illegal attribute QUEUE-READ or QUEUE-WRITE with illegal option COVER with illegal user (only 0 or 1 permitted) The system data transferred with the LOAD command are incorrect. DLNG parameterized incorrectly for LOAD – Wrong data block specified or incorrectly parameterized – – MOVE command executed incorrectly. DIR + FAT on the MDS do not correspond to the checksum. S The MOVE command cannot be executed. The checksum does not correspond to DIR + FAT. The data memory probably left the transmission window while system operations (e.g., write DIR + FAT) were being executed, or the data structure of the MDS is wrong. D0 09 The RESET command was transferred to the filehandler with the wrong parameters. S Check bytes 11 to 17 of the telegram D0 14 Sufficient memory space on the MDS is no longer available. The data are not completely written to the MDS. CREATE command: No further data blocks can be reserved for creation of a file. No more blocks are free. D0 15 The filehandler was unable to identify the MDS. The MDS must be formatted again. D0 18 The logical address specified for the address is located outside the file. The FAT contains an error. The MDS must be formatted again. D0 22 The data memory has been covered with the COVER command. A write command (e.g., UPDATE and CREATE) may not be allowed to destroy the data memory layout and is thus rejected. D0 23 COVER command: B-18 WRITE command: The MDS name specified in the command does not match the actual MDS name. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Error Messages Table B-7 Filehandler error messages ASCII Error Code Description E0 01 S The type of MDS in front of the SLG does not correspond to the set ECC mode. The MDS must be formatted again in accordance with the desired ECC mode. S The MDS is not a filehandler MDS. Format the MDS again. E0 02 No more directory entries are free. The file specified with the CREATE command can no longer be created. E0 03 The file specified with the CREATE command already exists in the directory. Two files with the same name are not permitted. E0 05 S A FAT block sequence error has been determined for a READ or WRITE command. The file allocation table (FAT) is faulty. The MDS must be formatted again. F0 01 S Wrong address given for the TRACE command. S The file addressed by a command (e.g., WRITE) does not exist in the directory. The file must be set up with CREATE. S Check file name. It may not be in ASCII format. S One or more files are to be read with QUEUE-READ but these files do not exist on the MDS. Valid data were not transferred to the user. F0 05 Write-access (WRITE, UPDATE or DELETE) to a file which may not be changed (i.e., protected by an appropriate attribute). S Use the ATTRIB command to change the access rights, and then start the WRITE/UPDATE/ DELETE command again. F0 06 The RWD switch on the ASM does not have sufficient rights for this command. The command was ignored. Check the switch. F0 07 QUEUE-READ: File length specified is shorter than the file length. F0 08 QUEUE-READ: The skip calculated by the filehandler is greater than 0FFF hex (4095 decimal). H1 01 The FB 230 call parameter or the DATDB/DATDW was parameterized incorrectly for the absolute call. Change the FB parameter in the calling program, and start a RESET command. H1 02 S The length of the loaded BEDB is less than 50 data words (i.e., FB 230 does not have sufficient space for the internal FB parameters). A new BEDB with the correct length must be loaded. Then start a RESET command. S The FB 230 for this type of PLC was not called (i.e., FB 230 for PLC 115U, FB 231 for PLC 135U and FB 233 for PLC 155U). S FC 56: Params_DB is too small. H0 03 The command index is illegal. Change the command index. H0 04 This command ID and thus this command is unknown to FB/FC. Check the command ID. H0 05 The access rights of the corresponding SLG do not permit this command. For example, when “R” access rights (i.e., read only) were granted to the SLG, WRITE commands cannot be executed for this SLG. Either the “RWD” FB parameter must be changed (and then a RESET command started to accept the change), or a legal command must be started. H0 06 The WRITE/UPDATE/LOAD/QUEUE-WRITE or QUEUE-READ command parameter specified in DW 9 (DLNG) of the DEDB is not permitted. Only a user data length of 7FF0 hex (32752 decimal) is permitted or a maximum of 210 decimal bytes for QUEUE-READ. Change DLNG accordingly. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 B-19 Error Messages Table B-7 Filehandler error messages ASCII Error Code Description H1 07 The data block specified in DW 1 (BEDB) does not exist on the PLC. The applicable data block must be loaded. Then start a RESET command so that the absolute addresses can be calculated. H1 08 This is a pure software error which cannot occur during normal operation. A RESET command must be started if this error does occur anyway. Two or more telegrams are written in the same page frame memory area. This means: S Check actual FB 230 operands, particularly SSNR” and KAN.” S The user program contains an error. S Check the hardware. – SIMATIC bus – ASM 401 – basic module and/or channel module – SIMATIC CPU H1 09 The check byte of the acknowledgment telegram which was read and the check byte calculated by FB 230 do not match (if check byte mode was enabled). A RESET command must be started. For remedy, see also H1 08. H1 10 The channel module has performed a hardware reset. This could have been caused by a voltage drop in the device rack or a plug-in contact problem, for example. The user must start a RESET command to parameterize the SLG again. H1 11 The acknowledgment which was received has absolutely no connection with running operation. This is a pure software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation. A RESET command must be started if this error should occur anyway. For remedy, see also H1 08. H1 12 The command ID of the command and the corresponding acknowledgment do not match. This is a software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation. A RESET command must be started if this error should occur anyway. For remedy, see also H1 08. H1 13 The first command block was not acknowledged correctly (i.e., the telegram monitoring parameters do not match). This is a pure software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation. A RESET command must be started if this error should occur anyway. For remedy, see also H1 08. H1 14 An error was determined while reading the interface monitoring register. This means that synchronization no longer exists between writing command blocks and reading corresponding acknowledgments. This is usually caused by a plug-in contact problem of the channel module. A RESET command must be started to set synchronization again. For remedy, see also H1 08. H1 15 The pointer to the start address of the user data calculated from the DATDB and DATDW (DW 1 in BEDB) parameters is located outside the specified data block (i.e., the pointer is too long). Either DATDW must be shortened, or the DATDB must be lengthened. Then start a RESET command. H1 16 The telegram monitoring parameters of the command and acknowledgment blocks do not match. This is a pure software or synchronization error which cannot occur during normal operation. If this error occurs anyway, a RESET command must be started. For remedy, see H1 08. H1 17 See error H1 16. B-20 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Error Messages Table B-7 Filehandler error messages ASCII Error Code Description H1 18 While a command is being executed (i.e., ready bit not yet set), the pointer to the start address of the data calculated from DATDB and DATDW was changed, and the absolute addresses are no longer correct. A RESET command must be started to calculate the absolute addresses again. H1 19 The absolute address which is accessed for reading and writing the data block is located outside the data block. Either the data block must be lengthened, or the pointer to the start address of the user data (DATDB and DATDW) must be corrected (i.e., give the data block more space). Then start a RESET command. H1 20 During running operation (i.e., FB 230 is being called cyclically), the PLC memory was compressed or the absolute location of the BEDB and/or DATDB data blocks was changed. The absolute addresses are no longer correct. A RESET command must be started. H1 21 This message tells the user that only a RESET command is permitted as the next command. All other commands will be rejected. H1 22 The ASM 401 (page frame memory) cannot be accessed (only for FB 231 and PLC 135U). This is a plug problem (i.e., hardware error) or a parameterization error (FB parameter SSNR and/or KAN). Check switch settings, and then start a RESET command. H0 25 QUEUE-READ: QUDBTYP or QUANZ parameter is not permitted. H0 26 QUEUE-READ: DB or DX from the specified DB/DX area does not exist on the PLC. H0 27 QUEUE-READ: QUDW pointer is located outside the DB or DX specified in QUDB. H0 28 QUEUE-READ: DB or DX are missing on the PLC or are too short to read in the user data. H1 30 FB 230 has found a system error. The acknowledgment of the filehandler or PROFIBUS DP master is not permitted. S S S S S S Contact problem of the CM 423 channel module in the ASM 401 Contact problems of the ASM 401 in the backplane bus of the S5 Static charging on the SLG cable Configuration not grounded or poorly grounded A RESET command must then be started. FC 46/56: Communication blocks SFC 58/59 have reported an error. The exact cause is located in a separate data word (FC 46 = ANZ2; FC 56 = error_BUS). H1 31 The parameterized channel number (MOBY DB) is outside the legal area (1 to 8). H1 32 ASM doesn’t react to startup procedure. This error is reported when the ASM doesn’t react when the FC sets the startup bit and this makes the handshake procedure during the RESET fail. Error bit and ready bit are set and the command is terminated. H1 33 Timeout for init_RUN If the init_RUN procedure is not concluded within a parameterizable time (e.g., due to an error on the ASM), this is reported to the user with error H1 33. Error bit and ready bit are set and the command is terminated. H1 34 init_RUN executed more than once The user sets the init_RUN bit again while an init_RUN is already running without waiting for the ready bit. The FC recognizes this and reports this error. Error bit and ready bit are set and the command is terminated. MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 B-21 Error Messages Table B-7 Filehandler error messages ASCII Error Code H1 35 Description ASM_Fehler When the FC ”realizes” that the ASM can no longer be addressed (reported by OB 122), the command is terminated, the error bit and ready bit are set and error H1 35 is reported. The failure can have various causes. – Voltage failure on the ASM – Bus plug disconnected or bus cable interrupted H1 36 S The DB of the pointer ”command_DB_number” doesn’t exist on the SIMATIC. S The ”command_DB” on the SIMATIC is too small (minimum of 30 bytes). H1 37 Parameter error in MOBY_mode The MOBY_mode parameter is checked each time the FC is called. When a value larger than 0Fhex is set, PC processing is terminated and error H1 37 is entered in the MOBY DB. Error bit and ready bit are set. H1 38 ANW outside permissible area (0 to 7) H1 39 There is a gap between two consecutive acknowledgments. The telegram counter DBN indicates to the FC that acknowledgments have been lost. H1 40 DBN is greater than ADB. Kx xx QUEUE-WRITE was parameterized incorrectly (DATDB/DATDW or DLNG). Option 0000 hex: The file entry parameterized in DATDB with the number xxx or xxx +1 is not correct. Counting of the file entries in DATDB starts with 1. Option 0001 hex: The file entry parameterized in DATDB with the number xxx or xxx +1 contains a file name which already exists on the MDS. Counting of the file entries in DATDB starts with 1. Note The file entries are incremented decimally. B-22 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 ASCII Table MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 C C-1 ASCII Table C-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 D Compatibility The following table provides customers and service personnel with a list of all types of MDSs, SLGs and ASMs from the MOBY I family. These type designators are also used on the name plates of the components. When types have been discontinued, this table can be used to look for a suitable replacement. Table D-1 Compatibility of MDS and SLG types (status: September 2004) Type Designator MDS 114 MDS 115 1 1 Description/Remarks Replacement Type Discontinued on 12.31.2000 Replacement type has different housing with same mounting dimensions MDS 115 for Ex zone. No CE. Discontinued as of 01.01.96. The MDS has no cover and is not welded. Discontinued MDS 213 E for Ex zone. No CE. Discontinued as of 01.01.96. MDS 404 MDS 404 MDS 302 1 MDS 401 MDS 402 MDS 403 MDS 404 MDS 407 E 1 Replacement type has 8-KB memory. MDS 402 MDS 413 E 1 MDS 438 E 2 Replacement type with FRAM MDS 439 E is smaller than MDS 438 E and requires a different mounting plate. The mounting holes are different for the user. MDS 439 E Order numbers 6GT2 000-0CD30-0AB0 and 6GT2 000-0CD30-0AC0 are compatible for the user. MDS 505 1 Greater temperature range. Temperatures up to 85° C possible. MDS 115-ZA22 3 MDS 115-ZA24 1 MDS 213 E 1 MDS 213 E-ZA223 MDS 506 MDS 507 MDS 514 MDS 515 1 MDS 404 MDS 404 8-KB RAM/FRAM Replacement type delivered with larger RAM memory. The data are lost when the battery is replaced. MDS 507 MDS 404 MDS 439 E MDS 514 Discontinued as of 10.01.2003 Different housing with same mounting dimensions MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 MDS 514 D-1 Compatibility Table D-1 Compatibility of MDS and SLG types (status: September 2004) Type Designator SLG 40 SLG 40-S SLG 41 SLG 41-S SLG 41C SLG 41CC SLG 42 SLG 42-ZA22 3 SLG 43 SLG 44 1 SLG 44-ZA28 1 SLG 44-ZA30 1 SLG 44-ZA07 SLG 44 (6GT2 001-0DA10-0AX0) Description/Remarks Replacement Type Read head with diameter of M30 Read head with diameter of M18 SLG 41 with turned antenna. As of 10.01.2004 the ordering number was changed from 6GT2 001-0AA00-ZA23 to 6GT2 001-0AA00-0AX0 SLG 42 with smaller range for Ex zone. No CE. Discontinued as of 01.01.96. Discontinued with effect from October 1, 2003 SLG 44 with wider range (1 m) SLG 44 with adjustable receiving sensitivity SLG 44 with adjustable range SLG 44 with adjustable range, 100% identical with SLG 44-ZA07 (August 2004) SLG 44-ZA07 SLG 44-ZA07 SLG 44-ZA07 6GT2 001-0DA10-0AX0 ASM 400 ASM 401 Phased-out with effect from October 1, 2004 Phased-out with effect from October 1, 2004 ASM 410 Phased-out with effect from October 1, 2004 ASM 420 Replacement type SIM is protocol-compatible; ASM is compatible with SLG connection. Discontinued as of 07.01.2002. No replacement with serial interface. SIM/ASM 424 Successor type uses same FB 240. The GSD file is new as well as mechanics and plug. Replacement type is PROFIBUS DPV1and not PROFIBUS-FMS. ASM 450 ASM 421 ASM 424 ASM 440 ASM 441 ASM 450 ASM 451 1 ASM 452 ASM 454 ASM 456 ASM 470 ASM 473 2 (6GT2 002-0HA00) ASM 475 2 (6GT2 002-0GA00) Discontinued with effect from July 1, 2002 Discontinued with effect from July 1, 2002 Replacement type is FC-compatible. Discontinued with effect from July 1, 2002 Replacement type is FC-compatible. New HW parameterization necessary. ASM 452 ASM 456 ASM 456 ASM 456 ASM 473 (6GT2 002-0HA10) ASM 475 (6GT2 002-0GA10) RF170C SIM 1 2 3 Discontinued. Replacement type is 100% compatible. Discontinued. Replacement type is somewhat compatible. Discontinued. No replacement type D-2 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Index Numbers 3RX9 802-0AA0, 6-28 3SX6 284, 5-3 6AW5 418-4F, 6-64 6AW5 451-....3, 7-16 6AW5 451-8AU, 7-16 6EP1 332-1SH12, 6-63 6ES5 491-0LB11, 6-14 6ES5 700-8MA11, 6-19 6ES5 700-8MA22, 6-19 6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0, 6-28 6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0, 6-28 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0, 6-57 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0, 6-46, 6-47 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0, 6-46, 6-47 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0, 6-47, 6-52 6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0, 6-39, 6-41 6GT2 000-0CA10, 4-4 6GT2 000-0CA20, 4-8 6GT2 000-0CD30-0AD0, 4-26 6GT2 000-0DC00-0AA0, 4-18 6GT2 000-0DC01-0AA0, 4-21 6GT2 000-0DG10, 4-24 6GT2 000-0EG00, 4-16 6GT2 000-1CF00, 4-11 6GT2 001-0AA00, 5-11 6GT2 001-0AA00-0AX0, 5-11 6GT2 001-0AC00, 5-15 6GT2 001-0AC00-0AX0, 5-15 6GT2 001-0BA00, 5-21 6GT2 001-0CA10, 5-25 6GT2 001-0DA10-0AX0, 5-29 6GT2 001-0EA10, 5-3 6GT2 001-0EB00, 5-7 6GT2 002-0AA00, 6-6 6GT2 002-0AB00, 6-6 6GT2 002-0BA00, 6-19 6GT2 002-0EB00, 6-28 6GT2 002-0EB20, 6-28 6GT2 002-0FA10, 6-47 6GT2 002-0GA10, 6-47 6GT2 002-0HA10, 6-56 6GT2 002-1AB00, 6-6 6GT2 002-2CE00, 6-39 6GT2 002-2EE00, 6-39 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 6GT2 003-0CA00, 7-11 6GT2 003-1CA00, 7-11 6GT2 005-0AA10, 6-64 6GT2 005-0BA10, 6-64 6GT2 005-0CA10, 6-64 6GT2 080-2AA10, 6-6, 6-28, 6-39, 6-47, 6-56, 6-64, 7-3 6GT2 090-0A..., 3-80, 5-15, 6-32 6GT2 090-0AN50, 3-88 6GT2 090-0AT12, 3-88 6GT2 090-0AT80, 3-88 6GT2 090-0BA00, 3-83 6GT2 090-0BA10, 3-83 6GT2 090-0BB00, 6-6, 6-10 6GT2 090-0BB10, 6-6 6GT2 090-0BC00, 5-15, 6-28, 6-32, 6-56 6GT2 090-0CA10, 4-16, 4-24 6GT2 090-0PA00, 4-21 6GT2 090-0QA00, 4-26, 4-28 6GT2 090-0QB00, 4-26, 4-28 6GT2 090-0UA00, 3-83 6GT2 091-0A..., 3-84, 6-6, 6-39, 6-41 6GT2 091-0AH50, 3-87 6GT2 091-0AN10, 3-87 6GT2 091-0AN20, 3-87 6GT2 091-0AN50, 3-87 6GT2 091-0CH20, 3-88 6GT2 091-0CH50, 3-88 6GT2 091-0D..., 3-85, 6-19, 6-25 6GT2 091-0DH50, 3-87 6GT2 091-0DN10, 3-87 6GT2 091-0DN20, 3-87 6GT2 091-0E..., 3-85, 6-46, 6-47, 6-52 6GT2 091-0EH20, 3-87 6GT2 091-0EH50, 3-87 6GT2 091-0EN10, 3-87 6GT2 091-0EN20, 3-87 6GT2 091-0EN50, 3-87 6GT2 091-1CH20, 3-84, 3-88, 6-28, 6-32, 6-56 6GT2 091-1CH50, 3-88 6GT2 091-1CN10, 3-88 6GT2 091-1CN20, 3-88 6GT2 091-1CN50, 3-88 6GT2 091-2A..., 3-84 6GT2 091-2AN10, 3-87 Index-1 Index 6GT2 091-2AN50, 3-87 6GT2 091-2CH20, 3-88 6GT2 091-2D..., 3-85 6GT2 091-2DH50, 3-87 6GT2 091-2E.., 3-85 6GT2 091-2EH20, 3-87 6GT2 091-2EH50, 3-87 6GT2 091-2EN10, 3-87 6GT2 091-2EN50, 3-87 6GT2 094-0AA0, 4-21 6GT2 094-0AB00, 7-11 6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA1, 4-26 6GT2 097-3AJ00-1DA2, 4-26 6GT2 303-1CA00, 7-11 6GT2 303-1DA00, 7-11 6GT2 381-1AB00, 7-11 6GT2 390-0BA00, 6-39 6GT2 390-1AB00, 6-39 6GT2 391-0B..., 3-86, 6-39, 6-41 6GT2 391-0BH50, 3-88 6GT2 391-0BN20, 3-88 6GT2 491-1HH50, 6-39, 6-41, 7-4 6GT2 494-0AA00, 3-81, 6-39, 7-4 A Acquisition Station ES 030-K Features/layout, 7-14 Ordering data, 7-16 Technical data, 7-17 Adapter floor plate for top-hat-rail mounting, 6-44 Amount of data, Transferred based on MDS speed, 3-20 ASM 400 Address settings, 6-11 Function block FB 250, 6-8 Layout and function, 6-4 Ordering data, 6-6 Plug connectors and their assignment, 6-10 Settings on the channel module, 6-13 SIMATIC adapter capsule, 6-14 SIMATIC S5 Configuration, 6-14 Switches and plug-in jumpers, 6-11 Technical data, 6-7 Index-2 ASM 401 Address settings, 6-11 Function block FB 230, 6-9 Layout and function, 6-4 Ordering data, 6-6 Plug connectors and their assignment, 6-10 Settings on the channel module, 6-13 SIMATIC adapter capsule, 6-14 SIMATIC S5 Configuration, 6-14 Switches and plug-in jumpers, 6-11 Technical data, 6-7 ASM 410 Configuration in ET 100U/ET 200U, 6-21 Layout and function, 6-18 Ordering data, 6-19 Setting the operating mode, 6-23 Slots in PLC, 6-20 Technical data, 6-19 Wiring of one or two SLGs, 6-25 ASM 424 Adapter floor plate for top-hat-rail mounting, 6-44 Dimensions, 6-44 Layout and function, 6-38 Ordering data, 6-39 Pin assignment and switches, 6-42 Technical data, 6-40 ASM 450 Dimensions, 6-34 Layout and function, 6-26 Ordering data, 6-28 Pin allocation, 6-35 PROFIBUS address and terminating resistance, 6-37 PROFIBUS configuration, 6-31 SLG connection technique, 6-31 Technical data, 6-29 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Index ASM 452 Dimensions, 6-34 Layout and function, 6-27 Operating mode, 6-31 Ordering data, 6-28 Pin allocation, 6-35 PROFIBUS address and terminating resistance, 6-37 PROFIBUS configuration, 6-31 SLG connection technique, 6-31 Technical data, 6-29 ASM 454 Adapter floor plate for top-hat-rail mounting, 6-44 Dimensions, 6-44 Layout and function, 6-38 Ordering data, 6-39 Pin assignment and switches, 6-42 Technical data, 6-40 ASM 470 Installation of the software, 6-53 Layout and function, 6-45 Ordering data, 6-47 Technical data, 6-48 Wiring to the SLG, 6-52 ASM 473 Configuration, 6-58 Dimensions, 6-62 Hardware configuration, 6-60 Layout and function, 6-55 Ordering data, 6-56 Pin assignment, 6-61 SLG connection, 6-60 Technical data, 6-56 ASM 475 Installation of the software, 6-53 Layout and function, 6-46 Ordering data, 6-47 Technical data, 6-48 Wiring to the SLG, 6-52 C Cable, Shielding, 3-74 Cable configuration, 3-80 Cable Lengths, 3-87 Chemical resistance of the mobile data carriers, 3-33 Communication Between ASM and User Program, 3-11 Between ASM, SLG and MDS, 3-8 Concept of shielding, 3-78 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 D Documentation Manuals, A-1 Operator control guides, A-1 Technical descriptions, A-1 E EMC basic rules, 3-76 EMC guidelines, 3-62 Avoiding interference sources, 3-70 Equipotential bonding, 3-71 F Field data, 3-15 L LEDs for MOBY, 6-61 LEDs for PROFIBUS DP, 6-61 M MDS 401 Definition of the field midpoints, 4-7 Dimensions, 4-5 Field data, 4-5 Mounting methods, 4-6 Mounting on metal, 4-5 Ordering data, 4-4 Technical data, 4-4 MDS 402 Definition of the field midpoints, 4-10 Dimensions, 4-9 Field data, 4-9 Ordering data, 4-8 Technical data, 4-8 MDS 403 Auxiliary lobes, 4-15 Dimensions, 4-13 Field data, 4-12 Ordering data, 4-11 Technical data, 4-11 Transmission window, 4-14 MDS 404 Dimensions, 4-17 Field data, 4-17 Ordering data, 4-16 Technical data, 4-16 Index-3 Index MDS 439 E Cyclic operation, 4-30 Dimensions, 4-28 Field data, 4-27 Life span, 3-61 Ordering data, 4-26 Technical data, 4-26 Temperature dependency of the transmission window, 3-56 Temperatures during cyclic operation, 3-58 MDS 506 Dimensions, 4-19 Field data, 4-19 Ordering data, 4-18 Technical data, 4-18 MDS 507 Changing the battery, 3-48 Dead battery measurement, 3-48 Dimensions, 4-23 Field data, 4-22 Ordering data, 4-21 Technical data, 4-21 MDS 514 Dimensions, 4-25 Field data, 4-25 Ordering data, 4-24 Technical data, 4-24 Metal-free area, 3-23 Flush installation in metal, 3-24 Mounting on metal, 3-23 MOBY hand-held terminal Filehandler functions, 7-8 Hardware, 7-10 Ordering data, 7-11 Setup and function, 7-7 System prerequisites, 7-9 Technical data, 7-11 MOBY I dialog, 3-17 MOBY wide-range power supply Connector assignment 24 V output, 7-5 Dimensions, 7-6 Ordering data, 7-4 Technical data, 7-4 P S SIM Dimensions, 6-67 Field data, 6-66 Layout and function, 6-63 Metal-free space, 6-66 Minimum distance, 6-66 Ordering data, 6-64 Plug connector assignment, 6-68 Technical data, 6-65 Transmission window, 6-67 SLG 40 Definition of distance D, 5-6 Dimensions, 5-6 Field data, 5-4 Metal-free space, 5-5 Mounting clamp, 5-5 Ordering data, 5-3 Technical data, 5-3 Transmission window, 5-5 SLG 40-S Definition of distance D, 5-9 Dimensions, 5-10 Field data, 5-8 Metal-free space, 5-9 Ordering data, 5-7 Technical data, 5-7 Transmission window, 5-9 SLG 41 Definition of distance D, 5-13 Dimensions, 5-14 Field data, 5-12 Metal-free space, 5-13 Ordering data, 5-11 Read head changes, 5-14 Technical data, 5-11 Transmission window, 5-13 SLG 41-S Definition of distance D, 5-13 Dimensions, 5-14 Field data, 5-12 Metal-free space, 5-13 Ordering data, 5-11 Read head changes, 5-14 Technical data, 5-11 Transmission window, 5-13 Plug connector assignment, 3-82 Presence check, 3-36 Function, 3-36 Parameterization of the MDS 507, 3-39 Index-4 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 Index SLG 41C Definition of distance D, 5-19 Dimensions, 5-20 Field data, 5-17 Metal-free space, 5-19 Ordering data, 5-15 Technical data, 5-15 Transmission window, 5-18 SLG 41CC Definition of distance D, 5-19 Dimensions, 5-20 Field data, 5-17 Metal-free space, 5-19 Ordering data, 5-15 Technical data, 5-15 Transmission window, 5-18 SLG 42 Definition of distance D, 5-23 Dimensions, 5-24 Field data, 5-22 Metal-free space, 5-23 Ordering data, 5-21 Technical data, 5-21 Transmission window, 5-23 SLG 43 Definition of distance D, 5-28 Dimensions, 5-28 Field data, 5-26 Metal-free space, 5-27 Ordering data, 5-25 Technical data, 5-25 Transmission window, 5-27 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 SLG 44 Definition of distance D, 5-32 Dimensions, 5-33 Field data, 5-31 Metal-free space, 5-32 Ordering data, 5-29 Reducing the receiving capacity, 3-52 Reduction of the strength of the sending field, 3-53 Technical data, 5-30 Transmission window, 5-31 Software MOBY, 7-2 Ordering data, 7-3 Supplementary power pack for SLG, 3-81 T Transmission window, 3-3 Between MDS 507 and SLG 44, 3-41 Effects of metal, 3-25 Reduction of Metallic Effects, 3-28 Using side lobes, 3-32 Transmit Period of the MDS, 3-7 Index-5 Index Index-6 MOBY I Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4) J31069-D0033-U001-A12-7618 TO: Siemens AG A&D SE EM MS PO Box 2355 D–90713 Fuerth FROM: Your name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Your title: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Your company: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Street: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ City: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Telephone:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Please tick your branch. r Automotive industry r Pharmaceutics industry r Chemical industry r Plastics processing r Electrical industry r Paper industry r Foodstuffs r Textiles industry r Process control technology r Transportation industry r Mechanical engineering r Other _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ r Petrochemistry Remarks/Suggestions Your remarks and suggestions help us to improve the quality of our documentation. Please complete this questionnaire as soon as you have time, and return it to Siemens. Title of your manual:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Order number of your manual:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Please enter your personal evaluation from 1 (good) to 5 (poor). 1. Do the contents of this manual meet your requirements ? 2. Is it easy to find the information you need ? 3. Is the information written in an easy-to-understand manner ? 4. Does the amount of technical detail meet your requirements ? 5. What is your opinion of the figures and tables ? If you encountered concrete problems, please use this space to explain. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
advertisement
Key Features
- Data transfer in industrial environments
- Configuration and mounting guidelines
- Mobile data memories
- Read/write devices
- Interfaces
- Accessories
- Error messages
- Compatibility